Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 396

LAN Switching and Wireless - FINAL

Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.5.3 Troubleshooting VLAN Configurations

2 A network administrator is implementing VTP in a large campus LAN that contains one hundred switches. What are valid considerations for reliability and administration? Using server mode on a single master switch and client mode on all other switches will provide the most fault tolerance for retaining VLAN information in all switches if power is lost on the network. Using transparent mode on all switches will allow for efficient administration and prevent VLAN data loss from the loss of any single switch. Configuring several switches in server mode will allow all VLANs to be entered from a single switch and

preserve VLAN data if any of the switches or connections are lost. Configuring one primary and one backup switch in server mode and all other switches in transparent mode will provide fault tolerance for the VLAN data and allow for efficient distribution of the VLAN configurations to all switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

Refer to the exhibit. Which Spanning Tree Protocol version is in effect? Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) Per VLAN Spanning Tree + (PVST+) Common Spanning Tree (CST) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.3 RSTP

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B, C, and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with host C or host D. What is the cause of this problem? There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are interconnected via a trunk link. Host A and host B are on the default VLAN but are not able to exchange traffic. What should be done to fix the problem? Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Remove the native VLAN from the trunk. Include a router or switch with Layer 3 capabilities. Configure the same native VLAN on both ends of the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured Router1 for inter-VLAN routing. A test of the network, however, shows that hosts on each VLAN can only access local resources and not resources on the other VLAN. What is the most likely cause of this problem? Switch port Fa0/1 is not trunking. Router interface Fa0/0 is possibly down. No routing protocol is configured on Router1. One of the router subinterfaces is possibly down.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

Refer to the exhibit. R1 is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. R1 can ping computer 3 but cannot ping computer 1. What is a possible cause for this failure? S1 port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. R1 does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer 1 is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/0 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? only hosts A and B only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, B, C, and E

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.2 Design Considerations for Ethernet/802.3 Networks

Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? QoS routing trunking VPN

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

10

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem?

All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

11 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? client root server transparent

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.4 VTP Modes

12

Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology? Cat-A Cat-B Cat-C Cat-D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.3.2 Step 1. Electing A Root Bridge

13 Which three statements are true regarding router-on-a-stick inter-VLAN routing? (Choose three.) requires the use of subinterfaces on the router requires an access link between the router and Layer 2 switch more cost-efficient and scalable than using multiple physical interfaces requires each subinterface to be configured with the no shutdown command can impact performance if many VLANs compete for bandwidth on a single router interface makes troubleshooting the inter-VLAN routing configuration much less complex than when using multiple physical interfaces

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 3, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

14 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.2 Wireless LAN Standards

15 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? SSID OFDM WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

16

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

17

Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced? Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.3 RSTP

18 What happens when the crypto key zeroize rsa command is entered on a switch configured with the transport input ssh command on the vty lines? A new RSA key pair is created. The switch defaults to allowing Telnet connections only. The switch is no longer able to make SSH connections as an SSH client. The switch allows remote connections only after a new RSA key pair is generated.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

19

Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a "password required, but none set" message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem? The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

20

Refer to the exhibit. What happens when a frame from a source MAC address different from 00a8.d2e4.ba27 reaches switch port 0/5? The frame is dropped.

The port is shut down. An error message is displayed. FastEthernet port 0/5 will show an err-disabled message.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

21 What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value? only the management VLAN all VLANs except the extended range VLANs all VLANs except 1 and 1002-1005 all VLANs

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

22

Refer to the exhibit. What does STATIC indicate in the output that is shown? Switch port Fa0/24 can only work in VLAN 99. VLAN 99 was manually added to the VLAN database. MAC address 0001.637b.b267 was learned from the source address of a frame that was received on switch port Fa0/24. MAC address 0001.637b.b267 was manually associated with the switch port Fa0/24.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

23 What are three benefits of employing a hierarchical network design? (Choose three.) Hierarchically designed networks can more easily be expanded to suit future needs. Hierarchical design models enhance existing bandwidth through the use of link aggregation. The hierarchical model allows for specialized functionality at each layer, simplifying device management. Use of a hierarchical design allows replacement of redundant devices with high-capacity network equipment. A hierarchical design uses firewalls instead of complicated port-based and distribution layer security policies. The hierarchical model allows the use of high-performance switches at all design layers, thus allowing for a fully-meshed topology.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option.

0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.1.2 Principles of Hierarchical Network Design

24 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks? DSSS OFDM SSID WPA

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

25

Refer to the exhibit. VTP pruning is enabled in the VTP domain that is shown. How will switch ST-1 handle Layer 2 broadcast traffic originating from host A on switch ST-C? It will be dropped. It will be forwarded out port Fa0/5 only. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5 and Fa0/10.

It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5, Fa0/10, and Fa0/15.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

26 What is the purpose of the Spanning Tree algorithm? It propagates VLAN configurations to other switches. It restricts broadcast packets to a single VLAN. It segments a network into multiple broadcast domains. It prevents loops in a switched network with redundant paths.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

27

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP address should be assigned to

this new host? 192.168.1.11 /28 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.33 /28 192.168.1.44 /28 192.168.1.55 /28

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

28

Refer to the exhibit. How will switch S2 manage traffic coming from host PC1? S2 will drop the traffic, unless it is management traffic. S2 will tag the frame with VLAN ID 99 when it forwards it over the trunk link. S2 will leave the traffic untagged when it forwards it over a trunk link. S2 will tag the traffic with the highest VLAN ID value when it forwards it over the trunk link.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

29

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

30

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11.

Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.4.2 Incorrect Channel Settings

31

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to download a previously saved configuration file from the TFTP server to Switch1. Which command will accomplish this task? Switch1# copy tftp://192.168.0.253/backup-confg nvram:startup-config Switch1# copy tftp://192.168.0.254/backup-confg nvram:startup-config Switch1# copy nvram:startup-config tftp://192.168.0.253/backup-config Switch1# copy nvram:startup-config tftp://192.168.0.254/backup-config

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

32

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is configured to participate in STP for VLANs 1, 10, 20, and 30. Which switch will become the root for VLAN 20? A B C D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.2 PVST+

33

Refer to the exhibit. The commands are entered into switch SW1 as shown, and an 802.1q trunk is successfully established. How does switch SW1 handle the untagged traffic that is destined for the trunk? SW1 will drop all untagged traffic. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 1. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 25. SW1 will send untagged traffic to all VLANs that are configured on the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks * 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

34

Refer to the exhibit. If switch SW1 is configured with the four VLANs as shown in the exhibit, how many physical interfaces are needed on router R1 to configure inter-VLAN routing using subinterfaces? zero one two four

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

35 Which two devices can cause interference with the operation of a WLAN because they operate on similar frequencies? (Choose two.) copier AM radio television

MP3 player cordless phone microwave oven

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 5 and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.4.3 Solve Access Point Radio and Firmware Issues

36 Which STP port type can only appear once on a segment, and must be present in order for traffic to flow on that segment? non-root port disabled port designated port non-designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.3.4 Step 3. Electing Designated Ports and Non-Designated Ports

37 What is a possible impact of setting too short an aging time in the MAC address table of a switch? overly large address table unnecessary flooding of packets excessive timeouts of static addresses impaired ability to dynamically learn new addresses

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

38 What is a result of improperly implementing a network with redundancy at Layer 2? an increase of unicast and multicast errors at Layer 3 a decrease in the amount of broadcast traffic end device malfunction because of broadcast storms an increase in throughput at all points in the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.1.2 Issues with Redundancy

39 Which type of traffic can still be received on a switch interface that is in STP blocking mode? BPDU frames multicast frames broadcast frames Layer 3 packets

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

40 In a three-layer hierarchical network design, which distribution layer function delineates broadcast domains? routing between VLANs aggregating traffic flows providing redundant links reducing the network diameter

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

41 Which switching method provides error-free data transmission? fragment-free fast-forward integrity-checking store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

42 Which switch forwarding method should be used on a network that employs frame classification based on an assigned Quality of Service (QoS) value? cut-through fast-forward fragment-free store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

43

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator issues the command shown on Switch1. What are two possible reasons that ports Fa0/1 through Fa0/4, and ports Fa0/11 and Fa0/12 do not show in the command output? (Choose two.) The ports have been configured as trunks. The ports have been assigned to the native VLAN. The VLAN that they are assigned to has been deleted. The ports currently do not have any devices plugged into them. The no shutdown command was not issued on these ports.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks * 3.3.3 Managing VLANs

44 Which statement describes the use of voice VLANs in Cisco IP telephony? The voice VLAN carries both tagged and untagged traffic. The voice VLAN carries untagged traffic having special QoS markings.

The voice VLAN must be configured on the switch port to which the IP phone attaches. Data and voice frames are tagged with same VLAN ID between the IP phone and the switch when a voice VLAN is configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

45

Refer to the exhibit. The broadcast traffic from PC1 is consuming bandwidth on the interswitch trunks. What should be done to prevent this from happening? Move PC1 to a port on SW3. Move PC2 to a port on SW3. Move PC1 to a port on SW2. Enable pruning for VLAN10 on the VTP server. Associate PC1 as a member of a new VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

46

Refer to the exhibit. A junior network administrator was tasked to configure all VTY lines on the switch for remote access. However, when the senior network administrator attempted to access the switch remotely, a "% Error in authentication" console message was received. What could be the cause of the problem? The VTY line password is entered incorrectly. The console password is missing from the switch configuration. The service password-encryption command is missing from the switch configuration. The enable password or enable secret password is missing from the switch configuration.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.1 Configure Password Options

47 A network administrator issued the erase nvram: command on a switch. What will be the outcome of the command? It will clear the contents of the MAC table. It will clear the contents of the VLAN database. It will clear the contents of the startup configuration file. It will clear the contents of the running configuration file.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

48 Which statement accurately describes a switch with all access ports assigned to the same VLAN? All users are in the same broadcast domain. A router is required for communication between the users. Bandwidth is utilized more efficiently, resulting in a reduction in costs. Performance is increased by keeping all users in the same Layer 2 network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

49 A network administrator enters the enable command at the Switch> prompt of a new switch. What mode will the switch enter? setup mode configuration mode privileged EXEC mode user EXEC mode

ROMMON mode interface mode

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.1 Navigating Command-Line Interface Modes

50 Which statement is true about open authentication when it is enabled on an access point? requires no authentication uses a 64-bit encryption algorithm requires the use of an authentication server requires a mutually agreed upon password

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.2.2 Wireless Security Protocols

ESwitching Final Exam - FINAL - C


1

Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1?

Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.5.3 Troubleshooting VLAN Configurations

2 A network administrator is implementing VTP in a large campus LAN that contains one hundred switches. What are valid considerations for reliability and administration?

Using server mode on a single master switch and client mode on all other switches will provide the most fault tolerance for retaining VLAN information in all switches if power is lost on the network. Using transparent mode on all switches will allow for efficient administration and prevent VLAN data loss

from the loss of any single switch. Configuring several switches in server mode will allow all VLANs to be entered from a single switch and preserve VLAN data if any of the switches or connections are lost. Configuring one primary and one backup switch in server mode and all other switches in transparent mode will provide fault tolerance for the VLAN data and allow for efficient distribution of the VLAN configurations to all switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

Refer to the exhibit. Which Spanning Tree Protocol version is in effect?

Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) Per VLAN Spanning Tree + (PVST+) Common Spanning Tree (CST) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.3 RSTP

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B, C, and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with host C or host D. What is the cause of this problem?

There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are interconnected via a trunk link. Host A and host B are on the default VLAN but are not able to exchange traffic. What should be done to fix the problem?

Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Remove the native VLAN from the trunk. Include a router or switch with Layer 3 capabilities. Configure the same native VLAN on both ends of the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured Router1 for inter-VLAN routing. A test of the network, however, shows that hosts on each VLAN can only access local resources and not resources on the other VLAN. What is the most likely cause of this problem?

Switch port Fa0/1 is not trunking. Router interface Fa0/0 is possibly down. No routing protocol is configured on Router1. One of the router subinterfaces is possibly down.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

Refer to the exhibit. R1 is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. R1 can ping computer 3 but cannot ping computer 1. What is a possible cause for this failure?

S1 port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. R1 does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer 1 is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/0 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal?

only hosts A and B only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, B, C, and E

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.1.2 Design Considerations for Ethernet/802.3 Networks

Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y?

QoS routing trunking VPN

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

10

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem?

All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

11 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements?

client root server transparent

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.4 VTP Modes

12

Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology?

Cat-A Cat-B Cat-C Cat-D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.3.2 Step 1. Electing A Root Bridge

13 Which three statements are true regarding router-on-a-stick inter-VLAN routing? (Choose three.)

requires the use of subinterfaces on the router requires an access link between the router and Layer 2 switch more cost-efficient and scalable than using multiple physical interfaces requires each subinterface to be configured with the no shutdown command can impact performance if many VLANs compete for bandwidth on a single router interface makes troubleshooting the inter-VLAN routing configuration much less complex than when using multiple physical interfaces

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 3, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

14 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.)

requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.2 Wireless LAN Standards

15 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another?

SSID OFDM WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

16

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.)

After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

17

Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced?

Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.3 RSTP

18 What happens when the crypto key zeroize rsa command is entered on a switch configured with the transport input ssh command on the vty lines?

A new RSA key pair is created. The switch defaults to allowing Telnet connections only. The switch is no longer able to make SSH connections as an SSH client. The switch allows remote connections only after a new RSA key pair is generated.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

19

Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a "password required, but none set" message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem?

The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

20

Refer to the exhibit. What happens when a frame from a source MAC address different from 00a8.d2e4.ba27 reaches switch port 0/5?

The frame is dropped. The port is shut down. An error message is displayed. FastEthernet port 0/5 will show an err-disabled message.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

21 What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value?

only the management VLAN all VLANs except the extended range VLANs all VLANs except 1 and 1002-1005 all VLANs

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

22

Refer to the exhibit. What does STATIC indicate in the output that is shown?

Switch port Fa0/24 can only work in VLAN 99. VLAN 99 was manually added to the VLAN database. MAC address 0001.637b.b267 was learned from the source address of a frame that was received on switch port Fa0/24. MAC address 0001.637b.b267 was manually associated with the switch port Fa0/24.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

23 What are three benefits of employing a hierarchical network design? (Choose three.)

Hierarchically designed networks can more easily be expanded to suit future needs.

Hierarchical design models enhance existing bandwidth through the use of link aggregation. The hierarchical model allows for specialized functionality at each layer, simplifying device management. Use of a hierarchical design allows replacement of redundant devices with high-capacity network equipment. A hierarchical design uses firewalls instead of complicated port-based and distribution layer security policies. The hierarchical model allows the use of high-performance switches at all design layers, thus allowing for a fully-meshed topology.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.2 Principles of Hierarchical Network Design

24 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks?

DSSS OFDM SSID WPA

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

25

Refer to the exhibit. VTP pruning is enabled in the VTP domain that is shown. How will switch ST-1 handle Layer 2 broadcast traffic originating from host A on switch ST-C?

It will be dropped. It will be forwarded out port Fa0/5 only. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5 and Fa0/10. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5, Fa0/10, and Fa0/15.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

26 What is the purpose of the Spanning Tree algorithm?

It propagates VLAN configurations to other switches.

It restricts broadcast packets to a single VLAN. It segments a network into multiple broadcast domains. It prevents loops in a switched network with redundant paths.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

27

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host?

192.168.1.11 /28 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.33 /28 192.168.1.44 /28 192.168.1.55 /28

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

28

Refer to the exhibit. How will switch S2 manage traffic coming from host PC1?

S2 will drop the traffic, unless it is management traffic. S2 will tag the frame with VLAN ID 99 when it forwards it over the trunk link. S2 will leave the traffic untagged when it forwards it over a trunk link. S2 will tag the traffic with the highest VLAN ID value when it forwards it over the trunk link.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

29

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet?

The router will drop the packet.

The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

30

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem?

Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.4.2 Incorrect Channel Settings

31

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to download a previously saved configuration file from the TFTP server to Switch1. Which command will accomplish this task?

Switch1# copy tftp://192.168.0.253/backup-confg nvram:startup-config Switch1# copy tftp://192.168.0.254/backup-confg nvram:startup-config Switch1# copy nvram:startup-config tftp://192.168.0.253/backup-config Switch1# copy nvram:startup-config tftp://192.168.0.254/backup-config

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

32

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is configured to participate in STP for VLANs 1, 10, 20, and 30. Which switch will become the root for VLAN 20?

A B C D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.2 PVST+

33

Refer to the exhibit. The commands are entered into switch SW1 as shown, and an 802.1q trunk is successfully established. How does switch SW1 handle the untagged traffic that is destined for the trunk?

SW1 will drop all untagged traffic. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 1. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 25. SW1 will send untagged traffic to all VLANs that are configured on the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

34

Refer to the exhibit. If switch SW1 is configured with the four VLANs as shown in the exhibit, how many physical interfaces are needed on router R1 to configure inter-VLAN routing using subinterfaces?

zero one two four

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

35 Which two devices can cause interference with the operation of a WLAN because they operate on similar frequencies? (Choose two.)

copier AM radio television MP3 player cordless phone microwave oven

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 5 and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.4.3 Solve Access Point Radio and Firmware Issues

36 Which STP port type can only appear once on a segment, and must be present in order for traffic to flow on that segment?

non-root port disabled port designated port non-designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.3.4 Step 3. Electing Designated Ports and Non-Designated Ports

37 What is a possible impact of setting too short an aging time in the MAC address table of a switch?

overly large address table unnecessary flooding of packets excessive timeouts of static addresses impaired ability to dynamically learn new addresses

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

38 What is a result of improperly implementing a network with redundancy at Layer 2?

an increase of unicast and multicast errors at Layer 3 a decrease in the amount of broadcast traffic end device malfunction because of broadcast storms an increase in throughput at all points in the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.1.2 Issues with Redundancy

39 Which type of traffic can still be received on a switch interface that is in STP blocking mode?

BPDU frames multicast frames broadcast frames Layer 3 packets

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

40 In a three-layer hierarchical network design, which distribution layer function delineates broadcast domains?

routing between VLANs aggregating traffic flows providing redundant links reducing the network diameter

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

41 Which switching method provides error-free data transmission?

fragment-free fast-forward integrity-checking store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

42 Which switch forwarding method should be used on a network that employs frame classification based on an assigned Quality of Service (QoS) value?

cut-through fast-forward fragment-free store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

43

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator issues the command shown on Switch1. What are two possible reasons that ports Fa0/1 through Fa0/4, and ports Fa0/11 and Fa0/12 do not show in the command output? (Choose two.)

The ports have been configured as trunks. The ports have been assigned to the native VLAN. The VLAN that they are assigned to has been deleted.

The ports currently do not have any devices plugged into them. The no shutdown command was not issued on these ports.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks 3.3.3 Managing VLANs

44 Which statement describes the use of voice VLANs in Cisco IP telephony?

The voice VLAN carries both tagged and untagged traffic. The voice VLAN carries untagged traffic having special QoS markings. The voice VLAN must be configured on the switch port to which the IP phone attaches. Data and voice frames are tagged with same VLAN ID between the IP phone and the switch when a voice VLAN is configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

45

Refer to the exhibit. The broadcast traffic from PC1 is consuming bandwidth on the interswitch trunks. What should be done to prevent this from happening?

Move PC1 to a port on SW3. Move PC2 to a port on SW3. Move PC1 to a port on SW2. Enable pruning for VLAN10 on the VTP server. Associate PC1 as a member of a new VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

46

Refer to the exhibit. A junior network administrator was tasked to configure all VTY lines on the switch for remote access. However, when the senior network administrator attempted to access the switch remotely, a "% Error in authentication" console message was received. What could be the cause of the problem?

The VTY line password is entered incorrectly. The console password is missing from the switch configuration. The service password-encryption command is missing from the switch configuration. The enable password or enable secret password is missing from the switch configuration.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.1 Configure Password Options

47 A network administrator issued the erase nvram: command on a switch. What will be the outcome of the command?

It will clear the contents of the MAC table. It will clear the contents of the VLAN database. It will clear the contents of the startup configuration file. It will clear the contents of the running configuration file.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

48 Which statement accurately describes a switch with all access ports assigned to the same VLAN?

All users are in the same broadcast domain. A router is required for communication between the users. Bandwidth is utilized more efficiently, resulting in a reduction in costs. Performance is increased by keeping all users in the same Layer 2 network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

49 A network administrator enters the enable command at the Switch> prompt of a new switch. What mode will the switch enter?

setup mode configuration mode privileged EXEC mode user EXEC mode ROMMON mode interface mode

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.1 Navigating Command-Line Interface Modes

50 Which statement is true about open authentication when it is enabled on an access point?

requires no authentication uses a 64-bit encryption algorithm requires the use of an authentication server requires a mutually agreed upon password

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.2.2 Wireless Security Protocols

1 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size at the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem? The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.3 Accessing the Command History

2 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator configures HyperTerminal with the parameters shown but is unable to connect to a switch via the console port. The administrator is using a tested rollover cable attached to the only COM port on the computer, and the connections have been verified. What is the likely problem? The cable is connected to the wrong port. The wrong connection speed is selected. The cable is the wrong type. The flow control setting is not correct. The stop bits should be set to zero.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.5 Prepare to Configure the Switch

3 Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A

from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.5.3 Troubleshooting VLAN Configurations

4 What is the purpose of issuing the command switchport mode access on a switch interface? disable port security make the port operational override the default port behavior force the port to be a part of a single vlan

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

5 Refer to the exhibit. Which Spanning Tree Protocol version is in effect? Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) Per VLAN Spanning Tree + (PVST+) Common Spanning Tree (CST)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.3 RSTP

6 Refer to the exhibit. The devices in the network are operational and configured as indicated in the exhibit. However, hosts B and D cannot ping each other. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The link between the switches is up but not trunked. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. Hosts B and D are configured with IP addresses from different subnets. VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 are not allowed on the trunk between the switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

7 Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem? All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

8 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? client root server transparent

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.4 VTP Modes

9 Which method establishes an administrative connection for configuring the Linksys WRT300N wireless access point? Associate with the access point and then open a HyperTerminal session with the access point. Physically connect to the access point and then reboot the computer to launch the configuration software. From a computer in the same IP subnet as the access point, enter the default IP address of the access point in a web browser. Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer connected to the access point so that it exists on the same network, and then reboot your computer to establish a connection.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

10 Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values? switch A switch B switch C switch D switch E switch F

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 6 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.3 Bridge ID

11 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.2 Wireless LAN Standards

12 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another?

SSID OFDM WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

13 Refer to the exhibit. What will be the result of the commands that are shown in the exhibit? Only clients on VLAN 2 will be able to use DHCP for addressing. DHCP server responses will only be permitted on interface Fa0/2. Only 100 clients are permitted to request DHCP addresses on VLAN 2. Client requests for DHCP addresses will be filtered out if the requests are not received on interface Fa0/2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.4 Common Security Attacks

14 What is an efficient and cost effective way to minimize the frequency and effects of broadcast storms on an Ethernet LAN? Connect each PC directly to a router port. Use access control lists to filter broadcasts from the network. Divide the computers into separate VLANs on the existing switches. Divide the computers into separate workgroups using different physical switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

15 Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a "password required, but none set" message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem? The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

16 Refer to the exhibit. Computer D sends a broadcast message. Which devices will process the broadcast message? computer E computer D and computer E computer D, computer E, and Router1 computer B and computer E computer B, computer E, and Router1 computer C, computer D, and computer E computer C, computer D, computer E, and Router1 computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E, and Router1

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 5 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

17 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts that are connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with hosts in the same VLAN that are connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? Introduce a Layer 3 device in the topology. Configure both switches in VTP transparent mode to allow them to share VLAN information. Reconfigure the fa0/1 interface on switch SW1 with a static trunk configuration. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to FastEthernet 0/1 on SW1 and FastEthernet 0/2 on SW2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

18 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to add IP phones to the network. To which devices should the IP phones connect? AS1 and AS2 DS1 and DS2 DS1, DS2, and CS1 AS1, AS2, DS1, and DS2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

19 What are two benefits of a hierarchical network model over a flat network design? (Choose two.) reduced cost of equipment increased network availability elimination of equipment downtime reduced size of the physical network layout simplification of management and troubleshooting elimination of the need for Layer 3 functionality

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.2 Principles of Hierarchical Network Design

20 Refer to the exhibit. What is true of the configuration of switch S1? Only VLAN 99 will be allowed to use the trunk links. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 are configured with a standard trunking protocol. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 should be configured as access ports to allow data from multiple VLANs to access switch S1. The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 because all connected interfaces have been configured with the switchport mode dynamic auto command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

21 Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18. The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

22 Refer to the exhibit. SW-T has been configured with a single trunking interface. Which VLANs will be allowed across the trunk? Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. All configured VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. Only the the management and native VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only VLANs that are configured on the VTP server in the domain will be allowed across the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

23

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.65 and a destination address of 192.168.1.161. What will the router do with this packet? The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

24 Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 3. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.31 /28 192.168.1.32 /28 192.168.1.52 /28 192.168.1.63 /28

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

25 Refer to the exhibit. VTP pruning is enabled in the VTP domain that is shown. How will switch ST-1 handle Layer 2 broadcast traffic originating from host A on switch ST-C?

It will be dropped. It will be forwarded out port Fa0/5 only. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5 and Fa0/10. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5, Fa0/10, and Fa0/15.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

26 What is the purpose of the Spanning Tree algorithm? It propagates VLAN configurations to other switches. It restricts broadcast packets to a single VLAN. It segments a network into multiple broadcast domains. It prevents loops in a switched network with redundant paths.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

27 Refer to the exhibit. Switches S2 and S3 are properly connected using an ethernet cable. A network administrator has configured both switches with VTP, but S3 is unable to propagate VLANs to S2. What could be the reason for this? The VTP configuration revision is different on both switches. The VTP domains are different on both switches. VTP pruning is disabled. VTP v2 is disabled.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.1.1 What is VTP?

28 When configuring a router to act as an SSH server, what should be configured before issuing the crypto key generate rsa command? the security domain name the VTP domain name the IP domain name the host name

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

29 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs. The connected hosts can only access resources in their own VLAN. What is the most scalable and cost effective solution to allow inter-VLAN communication in this network? Replace S1 with a router that has one FastEthernet interface for each PC. Add a second switch and divide the PCs so that each VLAN is connected to its own switch. Configure a router with two subinterfaces on one of its FastEthernet ports and connect it to S1 using a trunk link. Connect a router to a port on S1 and assign the IP address of VLAN1 to the connecting router interface.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

30 Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.) It is configured in VTP server mode. STP is automatically enabled. The first VTY line is automatically configured to allow remote connections. VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. The enable password is configured as cisco.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

31 What is the purpose of VLAN trunking? It improves network performance by reducing broadcast traffic. It selects the best path to transmit data in a switched network. It carries the traffic of multiple VLANs through a single link. It avoids spanning tree loops in a switched network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

32

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? Disable VTP pruning on SW2. Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

33 Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.4.2 Incorrect Channel Settings

34 Refer to the exhibit. What is the maximum number of VLANs that can be deleted from the Switch as it is configured?

zero four five eight nine

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

35 Why is MAC address filtering considered a poor choice in securing a WLAN? Available bandwidth is reduced. MAC addresses are easily spoofed. APs are more susceptible to DoS attacks. The payload encryption is easily broken.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.2.3 Securing a Wireless LAN

36 What can an administrator do to ensure that a specific switch will win a root election if all switches are set to their default configurations? Set the bridge priority to 16384. Change the VTP mode to server. Assign a port priority of 128 for all ports on the switch. Configure a loopback interface with the highest IP address.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.3 Bridge ID

37 RSTP is enabled in a switched network that is active and converged. Which switch port type assumes a discarding state on non-root switches? root port edge port alternate port designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.6 RSTP Port States and Port Roles

38 What is a result of improperly implementing a network with redundancy at Layer 2? an increase of unicast and multicast errors at Layer 3 a decrease in the amount of broadcast traffic end device malfunction because of broadcast storms an increase in throughput at all points in the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.1.2 Issues with Redundancy

39 What information in an Ethernet frame is used by a Layer 2 switch to build its address table?

source IP address source MAC address destination IP address destination MAC address

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

40 Which switch forwarding method should be used on a network that employs frame classification based on an assigned Quality of Service (QoS) value? cut-through fast-forward fragment-free store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

41 Which two conditions would require a VTP client to send a request advertisement to a VTP server? (Choose two.) The switch has been reset. A VLAN has been created or deleted. A five minute time period has elapsed. The name of a VLAN has been changed. The VTP domain name has been changed.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.3 VTP Advertising

42 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator is configuring RT1 for inter-VLAN routing. The switch is configured correctly and is functional. Host1, Host2, and Host3 cannot communicate with each other. Based on the router configuration, what is causing the problem? Interface Fa0/0 is missing IP address configuration information. IP addresses on the subinterfaces are incorrectly matched to the VLANs. Each subinterface of Fa0/0 needs separate no shutdown commands. Routers do not support 892.1Q encapsulation on subinterfaces.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.2.2 Configure Router-on-a-Stick Inter-VLAN Routing

43 Refer to the exhibit. PC1 and PC2 are plugged into port Fa0/10 and Fa0/11 respectively. How will this affect the port states of these switch ports? The ports will transition from blocking to learning immediately. The ports will transition from blocking to listening and learning states. The ports will transition from blocking to forwarding state immediately. The ports will transition from blocking to listening, learning, and forwarding states.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.5 STP Port States and BPDU Timers

44 Refer to the exhibit. To ensure optimum network performance, it is desirable that every user PC should be able to reach the file server by passing through no more than 2 switches. Which command in which context satisfies this performance requirement? spanning-tree vlan 10 root primary on SW1 spanning-tree vlan 10 root primary on SW3 spanning-tree vlan 10 priority 32768 on SW1 spanning-tree vlan 10 root secondary on SW2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.3.2 Step 1. Electing A Root Bridge

45 Which IEEE trunking protocol is used to encapsulate data traffic over a trunk link on a Cisco switch? STP DTP VTP 802.1Q

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

46

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator needs to remove the east-hosts VLAN and use the switch port from that VLAN in one of the existing VLANs. Which two sets of commands should be used when completely removing VLAN 2 from S1-Central while leaving the switch and all its interfaces operational? (Choose two.) S1-Central# reload S1-Central# erase flash: S1-Central# delete flash:vlan.dat S1-Central# configure terminal S1-Central(config)# no vlan 2 S1-Central# configure terminal S1-Central(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 S1-Central(config-if)# switchport access vlan 3

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 4 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.3 Managing VLANs

47 Refer to the exhibit. What is the effect of setting the security mode to WEP on the Linksys integrated router? WEP identifies the wireless LAN. WEP allows the access point to inform clients of its presence. WEP translates IP addresses into easy-to-remember domain names. WEP encrypts data between the wireless client and the access point. WEP translates an internal address or group of addresses into an outside, public address.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4

0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

48 Refer to the exhibit. Host A and host B are not able to send traffic to each other. On the basis of the output that is provided, what is the cause of the problem? mismatched speed settings mismatched duplex settings media type incompatibility incorrect port encapsulation

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

49 Which three actions are performed during the boot sequence of a Cisco switch? (Choose three.) The boot loader uses the self-contained switch operating system to boot the switch. The boot loader retrieves diagnostics routines via TFTP. The boot loader performs POST. The boot loader is loaded from RAM. The boot loader initializes the flash file system that is used to boot the system. The boot loader loads the default operating system if the flash-based operating system is corrupt or missing.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3, Option 5, and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

2.3.4 The Switch Boot Sequence

50 What advantage does cut-through switching provide? It enables QoS It forwards frames quickly. It provides an analysis of frames. It allows reduction of traffic by using error checking to drop corrupt frames.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2 This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

ESwitching Final Exam - FINAL - A


1 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size at the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem?

The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.3 Accessing the Command History

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator configures HyperTerminal with the parameters shown but is unable to connect to a switch via the console port. The administrator is using a tested rollover cable attached to the only COM port on the computer, and the connections have been verified. What is the likely problem?

The cable is connected to the wrong port. The wrong connection speed is selected. The cable is the wrong type. The flow control setting is not correct. The stop bits should be set to zero.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.5 Prepare to Configure the Switch

Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A

from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1?

Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.5.3 Troubleshooting VLAN Configurations

4 What is the purpose of issuing the command switchport mode access on a switch interface?

disable port security make the port operational override the default port behavior force the port to be a part of a single vlan

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

Refer to the exhibit. Which Spanning Tree Protocol version is in effect?

Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) Per VLAN Spanning Tree + (PVST+) Common Spanning Tree (CST) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.3 RSTP

Refer to the exhibit. The devices in the network are operational and configured as indicated in the exhibit. However, hosts B and D cannot ping each other. What is the most likely cause of this problem?

The link between the switches is up but not trunked. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. Hosts B and D are configured with IP addresses from different subnets. VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 are not allowed on the trunk between the switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem?

All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

8 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements?

client root server transparent

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.4 VTP Modes

9 Which method establishes an administrative connection for configuring the Linksys WRT300N wireless access point?

Associate with the access point and then open a HyperTerminal session with the access point.

Physically connect to the access point and then reboot the computer to launch the configuration software. From a computer in the same IP subnet as the access point, enter the default IP address of the access point in a web browser. Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer connected to the access point so that it exists on the same network, and then reboot your computer to establish a connection.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

10

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values?

switch A switch B switch C switch D switch E switch F

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 6 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.3 Bridge ID

11 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.)

requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.2 Wireless LAN Standards

12 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another?

SSID

OFDM WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

13

Refer to the exhibit. What will be the result of the commands that are shown in the exhibit?

Only clients on VLAN 2 will be able to use DHCP for addressing. DHCP server responses will only be permitted on interface Fa0/2. Only 100 clients are permitted to request DHCP addresses on VLAN 2. Client requests for DHCP addresses will be filtered out if the requests are not received on interface Fa0/2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.4 Common Security Attacks

14 What is an efficient and cost effective way to minimize the frequency and effects of broadcast storms on an Ethernet LAN?

Connect each PC directly to a router port. Use access control lists to filter broadcasts from the network. Divide the computers into separate VLANs on the existing switches. Divide the computers into separate workgroups using different physical switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

15

Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a "password required, but none set" message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem?

The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords.

The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

16

Refer to the exhibit. Computer D sends a broadcast message. Which devices will process the broadcast message?

computer E computer D and computer E computer D, computer E, and Router1 computer B and computer E computer B, computer E, and Router1 computer C, computer D, and computer E computer C, computer D, computer E, and Router1 computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E, and Router1

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 5

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

17

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts that are connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with hosts in the same VLAN that are connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem?

Introduce a Layer 3 device in the topology. Configure both switches in VTP transparent mode to allow them to share VLAN information. Reconfigure the fa0/1 interface on switch SW1 with a static trunk configuration. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to FastEthernet 0/1 on SW1 and FastEthernet 0/2 on SW2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

18

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to add IP phones to the network. To which devices

should the IP phones connect?

AS1 and AS2 DS1 and DS2 DS1, DS2, and CS1 AS1, AS2, DS1, and DS2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

19 What are two benefits of a hierarchical network model over a flat network design? (Choose two.)

reduced cost of equipment increased network availability elimination of equipment downtime reduced size of the physical network layout simplification of management and troubleshooting elimination of the need for Layer 3 functionality

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 5 are correct.

1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.2 Principles of Hierarchical Network Design

20

Refer to the exhibit. What is true of the configuration of switch S1?

Only VLAN 99 will be allowed to use the trunk links. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 are configured with a standard trunking protocol. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 should be configured as access ports to allow data from multiple VLANs to access switch S1. The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 because all connected interfaces have been configured with the switchport mode dynamic auto command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

21

Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown?

This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18. The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

22

Refer to the exhibit. SW-T has been configured with a single trunking interface. Which VLANs will be allowed across the trunk?

Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. All configured VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. Only the the management and native VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only VLANs that are configured on the VTP server in the domain will be allowed across the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

23

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.65 and a destination address of 192.168.1.161. What will the router do with this packet?

The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

24

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 3. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host?

192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.31 /28 192.168.1.32 /28 192.168.1.52 /28 192.168.1.63 /28

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

25

Refer to the exhibit. VTP pruning is enabled in the VTP domain that is shown. How will switch ST-1 handle Layer 2 broadcast traffic originating from host A on switch ST-C?

It will be dropped. It will be forwarded out port Fa0/5 only. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5 and Fa0/10. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5, Fa0/10, and Fa0/15.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

26 What is the purpose of the Spanning Tree algorithm?

It propagates VLAN configurations to other switches. It restricts broadcast packets to a single VLAN. It segments a network into multiple broadcast domains. It prevents loops in a switched network with redundant paths.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

27

Refer to the exhibit. Switches S2 and S3 are properly connected using an ethernet cable. A network administrator has configured both switches with VTP, but S3 is unable to propagate VLANs to S2. What could be the reason for this?

The VTP configuration revision is different on both switches. The VTP domains are different on both switches. VTP pruning is disabled. VTP v2 is disabled.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.1.1 What is VTP?

28 When configuring a router to act as an SSH server, what should be configured before issuing the crypto key generate rsa command?

the security domain name the VTP domain name the IP domain name the host name

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

29

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs. The connected hosts can only access resources in their own VLAN. What is the most scalable and cost effective solution to allow inter-VLAN communication in this network?

Replace S1 with a router that has one FastEthernet interface for each PC. Add a second switch and divide the PCs so that each VLAN is connected to its own switch. Configure a router with two subinterfaces on one of its FastEthernet ports and connect it to S1 using a trunk link. Connect a router to a port on S1 and assign the IP address of VLAN1 to the connecting router interface.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

30 Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose

three.)

It is configured in VTP server mode. STP is automatically enabled. The first VTY line is automatically configured to allow remote connections. VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. The enable password is configured as cisco.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

31 What is the purpose of VLAN trunking?

It improves network performance by reducing broadcast traffic. It selects the best path to transmit data in a switched network. It carries the traffic of multiple VLANs through a single link. It avoids spanning tree loops in a switched network.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

32

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information?

Disable VTP pruning on SW2. Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

33

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem?

Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.4.2 Incorrect Channel Settings

34

Refer to the exhibit. What is the maximum number of VLANs that can be deleted from the Switch as it is configured?

zero four five eight nine

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

35 Why is MAC address filtering considered a poor choice in securing a WLAN?

Available bandwidth is reduced. MAC addresses are easily spoofed. APs are more susceptible to DoS attacks. The payload encryption is easily broken.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.2.3 Securing a Wireless LAN

36 What can an administrator do to ensure that a specific switch will win a root election if all switches are set to their default configurations?

Set the bridge priority to 16384. Change the VTP mode to server. Assign a port priority of 128 for all ports on the switch. Configure a loopback interface with the highest IP address.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.3 Bridge ID

37 RSTP is enabled in a switched network that is active and converged. Which switch port type assumes a discarding state on non-root switches?

root port edge port alternate port designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.6 RSTP Port States and Port Roles

38 What is a result of improperly implementing a network with redundancy at Layer 2?

an increase of unicast and multicast errors at Layer 3 a decrease in the amount of broadcast traffic end device malfunction because of broadcast storms an increase in throughput at all points in the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.1.2 Issues with Redundancy

39 What information in an Ethernet frame is used by a Layer 2 switch to build its address table?

source IP address source MAC address destination IP address destination MAC address

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

40 Which switch forwarding method should be used on a network that employs frame classification based on an assigned Quality of Service (QoS) value?

cut-through fast-forward fragment-free store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

41 Which two conditions would require a VTP client to send a request advertisement to a VTP server? (Choose two.)

The switch has been reset.

A VLAN has been created or deleted. A five minute time period has elapsed. The name of a VLAN has been changed. The VTP domain name has been changed.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.3 VTP Advertising

42

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator is configuring RT1 for inter-VLAN routing. The switch is configured correctly and is functional. Host1, Host2, and Host3 cannot communicate with each other. Based on the router configuration, what is causing the problem?

Interface Fa0/0 is missing IP address configuration information. IP addresses on the subinterfaces are incorrectly matched to the VLANs. Each subinterface of Fa0/0 needs separate no shutdown commands. Routers do not support 892.1Q encapsulation on subinterfaces.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.2.2 Configure Router-on-a-Stick Inter-VLAN Routing

43

Refer to the exhibit. PC1 and PC2 are plugged into port Fa0/10 and Fa0/11 respectively. How will this affect the port states of these switch ports?

The ports will transition from blocking to learning immediately. The ports will transition from blocking to listening and learning states. The ports will transition from blocking to forwarding state immediately. The ports will transition from blocking to listening, learning, and forwarding states.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.5 STP Port States and BPDU Timers

44

Refer to the exhibit. To ensure optimum network performance, it is desirable that every user PC should be

able to reach the file server by passing through no more than 2 switches. Which command in which context satisfies this performance requirement?

spanning-tree vlan 10 root primary on SW1 spanning-tree vlan 10 root primary on SW3 spanning-tree vlan 10 priority 32768 on SW1 spanning-tree vlan 10 root secondary on SW2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.3.2 Step 1. Electing A Root Bridge

45 Which IEEE trunking protocol is used to encapsulate data traffic over a trunk link on a Cisco switch?

STP DTP VTP 802.1Q

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

46

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator needs to remove the east-hosts VLAN and use the switch port from that VLAN in one of the existing VLANs. Which two sets of commands should be used when completely removing VLAN 2 from S1-Central while leaving the switch and all its interfaces operational? (Choose two.)

S1-Central# reload

S1-Central# erase flash:

S1-Central# delete flash:vlan.dat

S1-Central# configure terminal S1-Central(config)# no vlan 2

S1-Central# configure terminal S1-Central(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1 S1-Central(config-if)# switchport access vlan 3

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 4 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option.

0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.3 Managing VLANs

47

Refer to the exhibit. What is the effect of setting the security mode to WEP on the Linksys integrated router?

WEP identifies the wireless LAN. WEP allows the access point to inform clients of its presence. WEP translates IP addresses into easy-to-remember domain names. WEP encrypts data between the wireless client and the access point. WEP translates an internal address or group of addresses into an outside, public address.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

48

Refer to the exhibit. Host A and host B are not able to send traffic to each other. On the basis of the output

that is provided, what is the cause of the problem?

mismatched speed settings mismatched duplex settings media type incompatibility incorrect port encapsulation

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

49 Which three actions are performed during the boot sequence of a Cisco switch? (Choose three.)

The boot loader uses the self-contained switch operating system to boot the switch. The boot loader retrieves diagnostics routines via TFTP. The boot loader performs POST. The boot loader is loaded from RAM. The boot loader initializes the flash file system that is used to boot the system. The boot loader loads the default operating system if the flash-based operating system is corrupt or missing.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response Option 3, Option 5, and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.4 The Switch Boot Sequence

50 What advantage does cut-through switching provide?

It enables QoS It forwards frames quickly. It provides an analysis of frames. It allows reduction of traffic by using error checking to drop corrupt frames.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

ESwitching Practice Final Exam 05-Jan-2011

1 What identifier in the BPDU creates a unique BID for a switch?

IP address MAC address bridge priority VLAN ID port priority

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.3 Bridge ID

Refer to the exhibit. Which two facts can be confirmed by this output? (Choose two.)

This switch shows no configuration revision errors. This switch has established two-way communication with the neighboring devices. This switch is configured to advertise its VLAN configuration to other VTP-enabled switches in the same VTP domain. This switch will drop all VTP advertisements that come from the switches that are configured in the same VTP domain. This switch will cause no disruption in the VTP domain operations if the rest of the switches in the same VTP domain have a higher configuration revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.3 Managing VLANs on a VTP Server

3 What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value?

All VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. The switches will negotiate via VTP which VLANs to allow across the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator enters the configuration shown to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to the switch. The Telnet connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem?

The SSH version number is wrong. SSH has been configured on the wrong line. Telnet and SSH cannot be configured simultaneously. The transport input command is configured incorrectly.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

5 Why is it important that the network administrator consider the spanning-tree network diameter when choosing the root bridge?

The network diameter limitation is 9. BPDUs may be discarded because of expiring timers. The cabling distance between the switches is 100 meters. The network diameter must be set to the number of meters of the cable between the root bridge and its farthest connected switch.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.5 STP Port States and BPDU Timers

Refer to the exhibit. Which statement is true regarding the information shown?

Only one VLAN is currently configured to use the trunk links. The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. A Cisco proprietary protocol is in use for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. Interfaces Gi0/1 and Fa0/1 are allowed to carry data from multiple VLANs.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

Refer to the exhibit. Computer A sends a broadcast message. Which devices will see the broadcast?

computer B computer B and Router1 computer C and Router1 computer B, computer D, computer E and Router1 computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1 computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

8 Which statement regarding the service password-encryption command is true?

The service password-encryption command is entered at the privileged EXEC mode prompt. The service password-encryption command encrypts only passwords for the console and VTY ports. The service password-encryption command encrypts all previously unencrypted passwords in the running configuration. To see the passwords encrypted by the service password-encryption command, enter the no service password-encryption command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.1 Configure Password Options

9 Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.)

Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled. Enable password is configured as cisco. All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. The flash directory contains the IOS image. VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. All interfaces are set to auto-negotiation of speed and duplex.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3, Option 4, and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

10

Refer to the exhibit. What three statements describe why Host1 and Host2 are unable to communicate? (Choose three.)

The switch ports are on different VLANs. The switch IP address is on the wrong subnet. The hosts are configured on different logical networks. A router is required to forward traffic between Host1 and Host2. The VLAN port assignments must be contiguous for each VLAN. The host default gateway addresses must be on the same logical network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 3, and Option 4 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

11 What is the correct order in which the STP components are chosen?

designated ports, nondesignated ports, root bridge, root ports nondesignated ports, designated ports, root ports, root bridge root bridge, root ports, designated ports, nondesignated ports root ports, root bridge, nondesignated ports, designated ports

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.3.1 STP Convergence

12 Which statement is correct about STP architecture?

Spanning Tree Protocol will guarantee a loop free Layer 2 topology. Spanning Tree Protocol guarantees the shortest path to destination networks. The switch with the highest priority will be assigned the lowest BID in the root election. The first step in the spanning-tree election process is to determine the root port. To select designated ports, the spanning-tree algorithm must determine the longest contiguous path from the root bridge.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

13 A network administrator is asked to connect four switches that are each configured with eight VLANs. Routers that have two FastEthernet ports each that support trunking are available. What is the minimum

number of routers needed to interconnect traffic from all of the VLANs if trunking is allowed?

1 2 4 8 16

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

14

Refer to the exhibit. Router R-West and switch S-West1 are connected via a single ethernet cable between the router interface fa0/0 and the switch interface fa0/1. The router and switch have been configured with the commands that are displayed in the exhibit. The network administrator enters the show interfaces trunk command and receives the output as shown. What is the cause of the "not-trunking" status for switch port Fa0/1?

The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk. Because the router does not support Dynamic Trunking Protocol, the trunk has not been established. The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for Dynamic Trunking Protocol to establish a trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.2.2 Configure Router-on-a-Stick Inter-VLAN Routing

15 After unpacking a new Linksys WRT300N wireless multifunction device, a user needs to change the default administrator password and make other configuration changes. What must the user do to access the device in order to make these changes?

Use a wireless client to associate with the WRT300N and then open a HyperTerminal session with the device. Establish a wired connection with the device and then reboot the attached computer to launch the configuration software. Establish a wired connection from a computer in the same IP subnet as the WRT300N and enter the default IP address of the device into a web browser on the computer. Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer that is connected to the WRT300N so that the computer and the WRT300N exist on the same network. Then reboot the computer to establish a connection.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

16

Refer to the exhibit. How is port Gi1/1 on SWT-A functioning in the spanning-tree topology?

It is sending and receiving data frames. It is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. It is participating in the election process by forwarding the BPDUs it receives. It is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.4.6 RSTP Port States and Port Roles

17

After listening for the presence of a signal on the network media, hosts A and C transmit data at the same time. In what two ways do the hosts respond to this situation? (Choose two.)

The hosts transmit a jam signal to ensure that all hosts on the network are aware that a collision has occured.

Because they are operating in full-duplex mode, the hosts resume listening for traffic in preparation for sending future messages. Because the hub will temporarily block traffic from one of the hosts, that host will be allowed to transmit once the wire is clear. Hosts A and C are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media for retransmission. After the backoff period of a host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before retransmitting.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

18

Refer to the exhibit. The switches have been configured as shown. The hosts that are connected to switch 101-2FL are not able to communicate with the hosts in their corresponding VLANs that are connected to switch 101-3FL. What should be done to fix the problem?

Configure port Fa0/2 on switch 101-3FL as a static trunk link. Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability into the topology. Utilize the switchport trunk allowed vlan all command on switch 101-3FL to permit the VLAN traffic. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces that are used to connect switches 101-2FL and 101-3FL.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

19

Refer to the exhibit. RTB is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. RTB can ping computer A but cannot ping computer B. What is a possible cause of this failure?

Port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. RTB does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer B is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/1 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

20

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 20. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host?

172.16.10.68 /27 172.16.10.99 /28 172.16.10.110 /27 172.16.30.96 /27 172.16.30.120 /28 172.16.30.146 /27

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

21

Refer to the exhibit. Router R1 is connected to a switch through a trunk. What two ways are indicative of how the router handles incoming VLAN traffic? (Choose two.)

Data from VLAN 20 is not being routed. Incoming traffic with VLAN ID 1 is processed by interface Fa0/0. Incoming traffic that has a VLAN ID of 10 is processed by subinterface Fa0/0.1.

VLAN traffic is processed on the subinterfaces even if Fa0/0 line protocol goes down. The router uses a unique MAC address on VLAN 10 and 20 by adding the 802.1Q VLAN ID to the hardware address. Traffic inbound on this router is processed by different subinterfaces depending on the VLAN from which the traffic originated.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3 and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 6.3.2 Router Configuration Issues

22

Refer to the exhibit. What is the purpose of the configuration commands that are shown?

to activate port Fa0/10 to make the port a member of VLAN 30 to activate port security on port Fa0/10 to add VLAN 30 to the trunk that is connected to port Fa0/10

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

23 Which parameter is associated with wireless authentication?

shared key SSID ad hoc channel

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

24 Where is the information of newly created VLANs stored on a switch?

CPU flash NVRAM RAM

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

25

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are configured with default bridge priority. Which port will act as the STP root port if all links are operating at the same bandwidth?

Fa0/1 interface of S1 Fa0/2 interface of S1 Fa0/1 interface of S2 Fa0/2 interface of S2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.4 Port Roles

26 Which statement correctly describes the spanning-tree path cost?

It is calculated based on the total number of switches connected in a loop. It is calculated based on the utilization of all the switches along a given path. It is calculated based on the bridge priority of the switches along a given path. It is calculated based on the sum of the port cost value, determined by link speed, for each switch port along a given path.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

27

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator is planning five additional VLANs to be shared throughout the VTP domain on S3. What action should the administrator take before creating the additional VLANs?

Create the VLANs on a switch in VTP server mode and allow them to propogate to the other switches in the domain. Modify the configuration revision to 10 to support the additional VLANs. Enable the VTP pruning mode in order to create the VLANs on S3. Enable the VTP v2 mode.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

28

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator enters the displayed commands to configure VLAN 30. What is the result of running these commands?

VLAN 30 will be added to S1, S2, and S3, but not to S4. VLAN 30 will be pruned from the VLAN database of S3. VLAN 30 will be added to the VLAN database of S3 but will not be propagated to S4, S2 or S1. VLAN 30 will not be added to the VLAN database of S3 and an error message will be displayed.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

29

Refer to the exhibit. Which password allows the administrator to enter the privileged exec mode?

cisco1 cisco2 cisco3 cisco

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.1 Configure Password Options

30

Refer to the exhibit. The switch VTY lines have been properly configured, but PC1 is unable to remotely manage the switch. How can this problem be resolved?

Configure the Fa0/1 interface of the switch in trunk mode. Configure a default gateway on the switch. Configure the native VLAN on the switch. Configure the Fa0/1 interface of the switch to allow all VLANs.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

31

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are configured as displayed and the native VLAN is the default. Which statement is true about the frames traveling between host A and host B?

They will travel untagged. They will be tagged with VLAN ID 1. They will be tagged with the trunk Port VLAN ID. They will be tagged with the highest VLAN ID.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.1.2 Types of VLANs 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

32

Refer to the exhibit. Assuming the bridge priority values are set to default on all switches, which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology?

Cat-A Cat-B Cat-C Cat-D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 5.2.3 Bridge ID

33

Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. What will be pruned in the VTP advertisements from switch ST-C to switch ST-1?

VLAN 30 VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 VLAN 1, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30 VLAN 2 through VLAN 29, and VLAN 31 through VLAN 1000

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

34

Refer to the graphic. In the Wireless menu option of a Linksys integrated router, what does the Network Mode option Mixed mean?

The router supports encryption and authentication. The router supports both wired and wireless connections. The router supports 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n devices. The router supports connectivity through infrared and radio frequencies.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

35 How are data frames identified and sent to the correct VLAN when exiting an Ethernet trunk?

Frames are forwarded to the correct VLAN based on the VLAN tag. Frames are always forwarded to the native VLAN when exiting a trunk. Frames are forwarded to the correct VLAN based on the source IP address. Frames are forwarded to the correct VLAN based on information in the MAC address table.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.2.2 Trunking Operation

36 When port security is used on a switch, which violation mode will cause an SNMP trap to be sent and traffic to be dropped when the number of secure MAC addresses for a port is reached?

sticky protect restrict shutdown

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

37 A wireless LAN access point will convert traffic between which two frame encapsulation types?

802.1 and 802.11 802.3 and 802.11 802.3 and 802.16 802.5 and 802.16

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

38 A wireless access point can function as which type of shared medium, wired LAN device?

hub switch router gateway

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

39

Refer to the exhibit. Users complain that they do not have connectivity to the web server that is connected to SW1. What should be done to remedy the problem?

Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Configure VLAN 100 as the native VLAN for SW1. Configure the trunk port in trunk mode on SW1. Attach the web server to a router and configure inter-VLAN routing.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

40 Which benefit is gained by designing a network with a small network diameter?

lower latency improved security increased redundancy higher interface bandwidth

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.1.2 Principles of Hierarchical Network Design

41

Refer to the exhibit. After receiving a console notification on Switch2, the network administrator begins to troubleshoot the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2. Which configuration change can be made to correct the problem with the trunk link?

Set the Fa0/1 interface on Switch2 to trunk mode. Change the trunk encapsulation on Switch2 Fa0/1 to dot1q. Change the native VLAN on Switch2 interface Fa0/1 to VLAN 100. Change the access mode VLAN on Switch2 to the default VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

42 Which configuration changes will increment the configuration revision number on the VTP server?

configuring trunk links on the VTP server configuring or changing the VTP password configuring or changing the VTP domain name configuring or changing the VTP version number configuring or deleting a VLAN or creating a VLAN name

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 5 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.2.3 VTP Advertising

43

Refer to the exhibit. The VTP domain has been configured as shown in the exhibit. None of the configured VLANs on SW1 and SW2 are present on SW3.

Reconfigure switches SW2 and SW3 in VTP transparent mode. Reconfigure the VTP password to be consistent on all VTP switches. Reconfigure all switches as VTP clients to synchronize the VLAN database information. Reconfigure the VTP server as a VTP client and then return to VTP server mode to reset the configuration revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

44 Using the command copy tftp:backup.cfg startup-config, an administrator downloaded a saved configuration from a TFTP server to a switch. Why does the administrator not detect any changes in the switch configuration after the download completes?

The command should have been copy startup-config tftp:backup.cfg. A backup configuration from a TFTP server cannot be copied directly into the startup-config. The command copy running-config startup-config should be used to save the changes on the switch. Downloading to the startup-config requires the switch to be reloaded in order for the configuration to take effect.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

45 In setting up a wireless infrastructure network, which device is used to associate a client computer to the network?

an Ethernet switch a wireless access point another wireless computer a hard-wired computer on the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

46 A network administrator enables sticky learning on all access mode interfaces of a Catalyst switch, saves the configuration, then connects hosts to the switch. After the switch operates for several days, the

administrator reboots the switch without saving the running configuration. What is the result?

All previously learned MAC addresses are lost. The switch reverts to non-sticky dynamic learning. Connected hosts are no longer able to communicate with the switch. Previously learned sticky addresses are retained in the switch configuration.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

47 A network technician is evaluating the desirable features of both access and distribution layer switches. Which two features are common to switches at these two layers? (Choose two.)

QoS PoE port security link aggregation application based filtering

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 4 are correct.

1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 1.2.3 Switch Features in a Hierarchical Network

48 What impact does the use of the mdix auto configuration command have on an Ethernet interface on a switch?

automatically detects duplex settings automatically detects interface speed automatically detects copper cable type automatically assigns the first detected MAC address to an interface

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

49 Which service should be disabled on a Cisco switch or router to prevent packet sniffers from capturing information about the device?

SSH VTP

CDP SNMP

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.4.4 Common Security Attacks

50 Which statement is accurate about fast-forward switching?

The switch stores the first 64 bytes of the frame before forwarding. After reading the destination address, the switch immediately forwards a frame. The switch receives the complete frame and stores it in buffers before forwarding it. The switch analyzes the frame for information about its destination. After confirming the integrity of the frame, the switch forwards it out the correct port.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas: CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

LAN Switching and Wireless - FINAL 3


1

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to add IP phones to the network. To which devices should the IP phones connect? AS1 and AS2 DS1 and DS2 DS1, DS2, and CS1 AS1, AS2, DS1, and DS2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

2 Which switching method provides error-free data transmission? fragment-free fast-forward integrity-checking store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

What information in an Ethernet frame is used by a Layer 2 switch to build its address table? source IP address source MAC address destination IP address destination MAC address

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

5 Which three actions are performed during the boot sequence of a Cisco switch? (Choose three.) The boot loader uses the self-contained switch operating system to boot the switch. The boot loader retrieves diagnostics routines via TFTP. The boot loader performs POST. The boot loader is loaded from RAM. The boot loader initializes the flash file system that is used to boot the system. The boot loader loads the default operating system if the flash-based operating system is corrupt or missing.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3, Option 5, and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.4 The Switch Boot Sequence

6 While configuring a new switch, a network administrator configures the switch as an HTTP server. What benefits does this configuration provide? This allows the switch to host web pages for the network. This allows remote VPN connections to the switch over the Internet. This is required if a web server or web farm is attached to the switch. This allows web-based configuration tools to be used with the switch.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

7 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size at the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem? The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.3 Accessing the Command History

8 What is the purpose of issuing the command switchport mode access on a switch interface? disable port security make the port operational override the default port behavior force the port to be a part of a single vlan

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

9 What is a possible impact of setting too short an aging time in the MAC address table of a switch? overly large address table unnecessary flooding of packets excessive timeouts of static addresses impaired ability to dynamically learn new addresses

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

10

Refer to the exhibit. What does STATIC indicate in the output that is shown? Switch port Fa0/24 can only work in VLAN 99. VLAN 99 was manually added to the VLAN database. MAC address 0001.637b.b267 was learned from the source address of a frame that was received on switch port Fa0/24. MAC address 0001.637b.b267 was manually associated with the switch port Fa0/24.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

11

Refer to the exhibit. What will be the result of the commands that are shown in the exhibit?

Only clients on VLAN 2 will be able to use DHCP for addressing. DHCP server responses will only be permitted on interface Fa0/2. Only 100 clients are permitted to request DHCP addresses on VLAN 2. Client requests for DHCP addresses will be filtered out if the requests are not received on interface Fa0/2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.4 Common Security Attacks

12 Why is it advisable that a network administrator use SSH instead of Telnet when managing switches? SSH uses TCP whereas Telnet does not. SSH encrypts only the username and password when logging in. SSH encrypts all remote management communications whereas Telnet does not. SSH sends a clear text message steam which reduces the bandwidth use for management.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

13

Which service should be disabled on a Cisco switch or router to prevent packet sniffers from capturing information about the device? SSH VTP CDP SNMP

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.4 Common Security Attacks

14

Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced? Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.3 RSTP

15 Which statement is correct about STP architecture? Spanning Tree Protocol will guarantee a loop free Layer 2 topology. Spanning Tree Protocol guarantees the shortest path to destination networks. The switch with the highest priority will be assigned the lowest BID in the root election. The first step in the spanning-tree election process is to determine the root port. To select designated ports, the spanning-tree algorithm must determine the longest contiguous path from the root bridge.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

16 What identifier in the BPDU creates a unique BID for a switch? IP address MAC address bridge priority VLAN ID port priority

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.3 Bridge ID

17

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values? switch A switch B switch C switch D switch E switch F

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 6 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.3 Bridge ID

18

Which device or devices should have the Spanning Tree Protocol enabled to prevent host traffic from creating a broadcast storm? Core_S1 Access_S2 and Access_S3 Core_S1, Access_S2, and Access_S3 Core_S1, Access_S2, Access_S3, and R1

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

19

Refer to the exhibit. What are two reasons for the Fa0/24 port being placed in the blocking state? (Choose two.) This switch is not the root bridge. The Fa0/24 port is administratively down. STP has detected links that create a loop. There is a change in the VTP configuration. The Fa0/24 port is overloaded with too much traffic for its configured bandwidth.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option.

0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.1.1 Redundancy

20 Which STP port type can only appear once on a segment, and must be present in order for traffic to flow on that segment? non-root port disabled port designated port non-designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.3.4 Step 3. Electing Designated Ports and Non-Designated Ports

21

Refer to the exhibit. Which Spanning Tree Protocol version is in effect? Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) Per VLAN Spanning Tree + (PVST+) Common Spanning Tree (CST)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.3 RSTP

22

Refer to the exhibit. All edge ports are configured with the spanning-tree portfast command. Host1 is recently connected to port Fa0/1 on switch SW1 . Which statement is true about the status of port Fa0/1? The port will transition into blocking state. The port will transition immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and then immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and immediately transition through the listening and learning states.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.9 Troubleshoot STP Operation

23

Refer to the exhibit. What is the maximum number of VLANs that can be deleted from the Switch as it is configured? zero four five eight nine

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

24 What are two characteristics of normal range VLANs? (Choose two.) not learned by VTP stored in vlan.dat file designed for service providers can contain ports used as trunks identified by a VLAN ID between 1 and 1005

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option.

0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

25 How are data frames identified and sent to the correct VLAN when exiting an Ethernet trunk? Frames are forwarded to the correct VLAN based on the VLAN tag. Frames are always forwarded to the native VLAN when exiting a trunk. Frames are forwarded to the correct VLAN based on the source IP address. Frames are forwarded to the correct VLAN based on information in the MAC address table.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.2 Trunking Operation

26

Refer to the exhibit. What is the purpose of the configuration commands that are shown? to activate port Fa0/10 to make the port a member of VLAN 30 to activate port security on port Fa0/10 to add VLAN 30 to the trunk that is connected to port Fa0/10

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

27 How does a switch that is configured for 802.1Q trunking handle untagged frames that are received on a trunk port? The frames are dropped. The frames are assigned to the native VLAN. The frames are assigned to the default VLAN. The frames are assigned to the management VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

28

Refer to the exhibit. R1 is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. R1 can ping computer 3 but

cannot ping computer 1. What is a possible cause for this failure? S1 port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. R1 does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer 1 is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/0 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

29

Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? QoS routing trunking VPN

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

30

Refer to the exhibit. What is true of the configuration of switch S1? Only VLAN 99 will be allowed to use the trunk links. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 are configured with a standard trunking protocol. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 should be configured as access ports to allow data from multiple VLANs to access switch S1. The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 because all connected interfaces have been configured with the switchport mode dynamic auto command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

31

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are true about the operation of the interfaces? (Choose two.) Incoming traffic with VLAN ID 0 is processed by interface fa0/0. Incoming traffic that has a VLAN ID of 2 is processed by subinterface fa0/0.2. Both subinterfaces remain up with line protocol up, even if fa0/0 line protocol is down. Subinterfaces use unique MAC addresses by adding the 802.1Q VLAN ID to the hardware address. Traffic inbound on this router is processed by different subinterfaces, depending on the VLAN from which

the traffic originated.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.2 Router Configuration Issues

32 A network administrator is asked to connect four switches that are each configured with eight VLANs. Routers that have two FastEthernet ports each that support trunking are available. What is the minimum number of routers needed to interconnect traffic from all of the VLANs if trunking is allowed? 1 2 4 8 16

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

33

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.65 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? The router will ignore the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

34 What are two requirements for configuring inter-VLAN routing using the router-on-a-stick model? (Choose two.) Each subinterface should be configured with its own IP address, subnet mask, and unique VLAN assignment. The physical interface of the router must be connected to a trunk link on the adjacent switch. The number of physical interfaces on the router should match the number of VLANs. Different static VLANs should be assigned to different interfaces of the router. The router should be configured as the VTP server.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 2 are correct.

1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

35

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are interconnected via a trunk link. Host A and host B are on the default VLAN but are not able to exchange traffic. What should be done to fix the problem? Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Remove the native VLAN from the trunk. Include a router or switch with Layer 3 capabilities. Configure the same native VLAN on both ends of the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

36

Refer to the exhibit. The devices in the network are operational and configured as indicated in the exhibit.

However, hosts A and D cannot ping each other. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The link between the switches is up but not trunked. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. Hosts A and D are configured with IP addresses from different subnets. VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 are not allowed on the trunk between the switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

37

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs. The connected hosts can only access resources in their own VLAN. What is the most scalable and cost effective solution to allow inter-VLAN communication in this network? Replace S1 with a router that has one FastEthernet interface for each PC. Add a second switch and divide the PCs so that each VLAN is connected to its own switch. Configure a router with two subinterfaces on one of its FastEthernet ports and connect it to S1 using a trunk link. Connect a router to a port on S1 and assign the IP address of VLAN1 to the connecting router interface.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

38

Refer to the exhibit. After the listed commands are entered into router R1 and switch S1, the administrator enters the show interface fa0/1 trunk and gets the results shown. What is the likely problem? The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk. The trunk has not been established because the router does not support dynamic trunking protocol. The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for dynamic trunking protocol to establish a trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.2.1 Configure Inter-VLAN Routing

39

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B, C, and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with host C or host D. What is the cause of this problem?

There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

40 Which configuration changes will increment the configuration revision number on the VTP server? configuring trunk links on the VTP server configuring or changing the VTP password configuring or changing the VTP domain name configuring or changing the VTP version number configuring or deleting a VLAN or creating a VLAN name

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 5 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.3 VTP Advertising

41 What is the purpose of VTP pruning? to restrict traffic on specified trunk lines to designate switches that do not participate in VTP to advertise VTP domain information to specified switches only to reduce the propagation of VTP advertisements in the switched network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.1.1 What is VTP?

42 A new switch is to be added to an existing network in a remote office. The network administrator does not want the technicians in the remote office to be able to add new VLANs to the switch, but the switch should receive VLAN updates from the VTP domain. Which two steps must be performed to configure VTP on the new switch to meet these conditions? (Choose two.) Configure an IP address on the new switch. Configure the existing VTP domain name on the new switch. Configure all ports of both switches to access mode. Configure the new switch as a VTP client. Enable VTP pruning.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 4 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.4 VTP Modes

43

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem? All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

44

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator is planning five additional VLANs to be shared throughout the VTP domain on S3. What action should the administrator take before creating the additional VLANs?

Create the VLANs on a switch in VTP server mode and allow them to propogate to the other switches in the domain. Modify the configuration revision to 10 to support the additional VLANs. Enable the VTP pruning mode in order to create the VLANs on S3. Enable the VTP v2 mode.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

45

Refer to the exhibit. Switches S2 and S3 are properly connected using an ethernet cable. A network administrator has configured both switches with VTP, but S3 is unable to propagate VLANs to S2. What could be the reason for this? The VTP configuration revision is different on both switches. The VTP domains are different on both switches. VTP pruning is disabled. VTP v2 is disabled.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.1.1 What is VTP?

46 A wireless LAN access point will convert traffic between which two frame encapsulation types? 802.1 and 802.11 802.3 and 802.11 802.3 and 802.16 802.5 and 802.16

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

47 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? SSID OFDM WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

48 A wireless client is attempting to establish a connection with a wireless access point. What process does the client use to discover the access points which are available to it? probing beaconing association authentication

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

49 Why is MAC address filtering considered a poor choice in securing a WLAN? Available bandwidth is reduced. MAC addresses are easily spoofed. APs are more susceptible to DoS attacks. The payload encryption is easily broken.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.2.3 Securing a Wireless LAN

50 Which combination is required to establish a connection to initially configure the Linksys WRT300N wireless access device? a computer with a console connection to the WRT300N a computer with a wireless connection to the WRT300N a computer with an AUX port connection to the WRT300N a computer configured in the same IP subnet as the WRT300N and a direct cable connection to it

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

LAN Switching and Wireless - FINAL 2


1 In a three-layer hierarchical network design, which distribution layer function delineates broadcast domains? routing between VLANs

aggregating traffic flows providing redundant links reducing the network diameter

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

2 What two methods can be used to remove MAC address table entries from a switch? (Choose two.) Power cycle the switch to clear all dynamically learned addresses. The clear switching-tables command will remove statically configured entries. The clear mac-address-table command will remove statically and dynamically configured table entries. The erase flash command will clear all statically configured table entries. Statically configured MAC addresses will automatically be removed from the address table 300 minutes after the last activity on a switch port.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.5.1 Basic Switch Configuration

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? only hosts A and B only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, B, C, and E

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.2 Design Considerations for Ethernet/802.3 Networks

4 What impact does the use of the mdix auto configuration command have on an Ethernet interface on a switch? automatically detects duplex settings automatically detects interface speed automatically detects copper cable type automatically assigns the first detected MAC address to an interface

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

5 Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.) It is configured in VTP server mode. STP is automatically enabled. The first VTY line is automatically configured to allow remote connections. VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. The enable password is configured as cisco.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

6 While configuring a new switch, a network administrator configures the switch as an HTTP server. What benefits does this configuration provide? This allows the switch to host web pages for the network. This allows remote VPN connections to the switch over the Internet. This is required if a web server or web farm is attached to the switch. This allows web-based configuration tools to be used with the switch.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

Refer to the exhibit. The configuration steps that are listed in the exhibit have been entered in switch S1 via the console. Subsequent attempts to telnet to the switch are not successful. What is causing the problem? The switch must be configured with SSH version 1. The transport input command must specify Telnet access. The RSA keys must be returned to zero before SSH will permit Telnet access. The ip domain-name command must also be entered in line configuration mode for the vty lines.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

What is a possible impact of setting too short an aging time in the MAC address table of a switch? overly large address table unnecessary flooding of packets excessive timeouts of static addresses impaired ability to dynamically learn new addresses

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18. The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

10 An administrator is troubleshooting a PC on the network which is suffering from slow and intermittent connectivity. The PC has a ping success rate to the default gateway of less than half the ping attempts. Other PCs on the switch can consistently ping the default gateway. The switch port is configured for auto duplex and the PC is configured for full duplex. What will commonly cause this problem? The PC is set to full duplex. The switch port fails to autonegotiate the duplex setting and defaults to half duplex, which causes a duplex mismatch. The switch traffic is exceeding available frame buffers. The result is that frames are being dropped. The PC and the default gateway have different bandwidth Ethernet ports. The default gateway is not on the same switch that the PC is.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

11 Using the command copy tftp:backup.cfg startup-config, an administrator downloaded a saved configuration from a TFTP server to a switch. Why does the administrator not detect any changes in the switch configuration after the download completes? The command should have been copy startup-config tftp:backup.cfg. A backup configuration from a TFTP server cannot be copied directly into the startup-config. The command copy running-config startup-config should be used to save the changes on the switch. Downloading to the startup-config requires the switch to be reloaded in order for the configuration to take effect.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

12

Refer to the exhibit. The teacher host is connected to port Fa0/7 on switch STW. A student has decided to share access to the Internet by attaching a hub and laptop to STW as shown. What will be the result of the student making this connection? The Fa0/7 port of STW will be shutdown. The student will gain full access to the Internet. Both the teacher and student will be able to receive data but only the teacher will be able to send. The frames from the laptop will be dropped, but the teacher host will maintain connectivity with the network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

13 Why is it advisable that a network administrator use SSH instead of Telnet when managing switches? SSH uses TCP whereas Telnet does not. SSH encrypts only the username and password when logging in. SSH encrypts all remote management communications whereas Telnet does not. SSH sends a clear text message steam which reduces the bandwidth use for management.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

14

Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced? Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.3 RSTP

15

Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology? Cat-A Cat-B Cat-C Cat-D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.3.2 Step 1. Electing A Root Bridge

16

Refer to the exhibit. How is port Gi1/1 on SWT-A functioning in the spanning-tree topology? It is sending and receiving data frames. It is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. It is participating in the election process by forwarding the BPDUs it receives. It is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.6 RSTP Port States and Port Roles

17 Which value determines if a switch becomes the central point of reference in the spanning tree topology? lowest bridge ID highest revision number lowest numeric IP address highest numeric MAC address

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

18 What is the purpose of the Spanning Tree algorithm? It propagates VLAN configurations to other switches. It restricts broadcast packets to a single VLAN. It segments a network into multiple broadcast domains.

It prevents loops in a switched network with redundant paths.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

19 Which STP port type can only appear once on a segment, and must be present in order for traffic to flow on that segment? non-root port disabled port designated port non-designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.3.4 Step 3. Electing Designated Ports and Non-Designated Ports

20 Which type of traffic can still be received on a switch interface that is in STP blocking mode? BPDU frames

multicast frames broadcast frames Layer 3 packets

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

21

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is configured to participate in STP for VLANs 1, 10, 20, and 30. Which switch will become the root for VLAN 20? A B C D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.2 PVST+

22

Refer to the exhibit. All edge ports are configured with the spanning-tree portfast command. Host1 is recently connected to port Fa0/1 on switch SW1 . Which statement is true about the status of port Fa0/1? The port will transition into blocking state. The port will transition immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and then immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and immediately transition through the listening and learning states.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.9 Troubleshoot STP Operation

23 Which statement describes the use of voice VLANs in Cisco IP telephony? The voice VLAN carries both tagged and untagged traffic. The voice VLAN carries untagged traffic having special QoS markings. The voice VLAN must be configured on the switch port to which the IP phone attaches. Data and voice frames are tagged with same VLAN ID between the IP phone and the switch when a voice VLAN is configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

24

Refer to the exhibit. All trunk links are operational and all VLANs are allowed on all trunk links. An ARP request is sent by computer 5. Which device or devices will receive this message? only computer 4 computer 3 and RTR-A computer 4 and RTR-A computer 1, computer 2, computer 4, and RTR-A computer 1, computer 2, computer 3, computer 4, and RTR-A all of the computers and the router

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

25 What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value? only the management VLAN all VLANs except the extended range VLANs

all VLANs except 1 and 1002-1005 all VLANs

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

26

Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.5.3 Troubleshooting VLAN Configurations

27

Refer to the exhibit. The devices in the network are operational and configured as indicated in the exhibit. However, hosts B and D cannot ping each other. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The link between the switches is up but not trunked. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. Hosts B and D are configured with IP addresses from different subnets. VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 are not allowed on the trunk between the switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

28

Refer to the exhibit. What is true of the configuration of switch S1? A Cisco proprietary protocol is in use for ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 have been configured with the switchport mode access command. Untagged frames received on ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 will be placed on VLAN 1. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 are configured to carry data from multiple VLANs.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.2 Trunking Operation

29

Refer to the exhibit. How does SW1 manage traffic coming from Host A? SW1 drops the traffic because it is untagged. SW1 leaves the traffic untagged and forwards it over the trunk. SW1 tags the traffic with the lowest VLAN ID value and forwards it over the trunk link. SW1 encapsulates the traffic with 802.1Q encapsulation and forwards it over the trunk link.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

30

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are true about the operation of the interfaces? (Choose two.)

Incoming traffic with VLAN ID 0 is processed by interface fa0/0. Incoming traffic that has a VLAN ID of 2 is processed by subinterface fa0/0.2. Both subinterfaces remain up with line protocol up, even if fa0/0 line protocol is down. Subinterfaces use unique MAC addresses by adding the 802.1Q VLAN ID to the hardware address. Traffic inbound on this router is processed by different subinterfaces, depending on the VLAN from which the traffic originated.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.2 Router Configuration Issues

31

Refer to the exhibit. A company has acquired a new office in a campus environment. Switches in the existing office and the new office are directly connected by a trunk link. The VLANs and IP addressing are setup as shown in the exhibit. The computers in each office are not able to ping each other. What will fix the problem? Use an access link between S2 and S3. Connect S2 and S3 to a common router. Set the subnet mask in the new office to /24. Configure the new office default gateway to 172.17.10.1 Change the port assignments in the new office to a different VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

32

Refer to the exhibit. If switch SW1 is configured with the four VLANs as shown in the exhibit, how many physical interfaces are needed on router R1 to configure inter-VLAN routing using subinterfaces? zero one two four

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

33

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.65 and a destination address of 192.168.1.161. What will the router do with this packet?

The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

34 A network administrator configures a switch port with the command switchport mode dynamic auto. What is the resulting behavior of the switch port? The switch port is able to trunk if the remote switch port is set to auto. The switch port is able to trunk if the remote switch port is set to desirable. The switch port will be disabled if it is unable to successfully negotiate trunking. A successful trunk will be established if the remote switch is non-Cisco but the port is configured for trunking.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

35

Refer to the exhibit. Which three options correctly identify information that could be associated with this output?(Choose three.) Interface FastEthernet3/0/0 is subinterfaced. A non-proprietary trunking protocol is in use. The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design. A shutdown command has been applied to interface FastEthernet3/0/0. Interface FastEthernet3/0/0.3 is mapped to the default management VLAN. An IP address should be applied to FastEthernet3/0/0 for correct data routing.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

36

Refer to the exhibit. Users complain that they do not have connectivity to the web server that is connected to SW1. What should be done to remedy the problem? Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Configure VLAN 100 as the native VLAN for SW1. Configure the trunk port in trunk mode on SW1.

Attach the web server to a router and configure inter-VLAN routing.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

37

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 192.168.1.11 /28 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.33 /28 192.168.1.44 /28 192.168.1.55 /28

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

38

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured Router1 for inter-VLAN routing. A test of the network, however, shows that hosts on each VLAN can only access local resources and not resources on the other VLAN. What is the most likely cause of this problem? Switch port Fa0/1 is not trunking. Router interface Fa0/0 is possibly down. No routing protocol is configured on Router1. One of the router subinterfaces is possibly down.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

39

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B, C, and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with host C or host D. What is the cause of this problem? There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

40 Which configuration changes will increment the configuration revision number on the VTP server? configuring trunk links on the VTP server configuring or changing the VTP password configuring or changing the VTP domain name configuring or changing the VTP version number configuring or deleting a VLAN or creating a VLAN name

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 5 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.3 VTP Advertising

41 The network administrator wants to configure a switch to pass VLAN update information to other switches in the domain but not update its own local VLAN database. Which two steps should the administrator perform to achieve this? (Choose two.)

Reset the VTP counters. Configure VTP version 1 on the switch. Configure the VTP mode of the switch to transparent. Verify that the switch has a higher configuration revision number. Configure the switch with the same VTP domain name as other switches in the network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.4 VTP Modes

42

Refer to the exhibit. VLAN 10 has been configured on the VTP server. Users who are assigned to VLAN 10 are connected as shown in the exhibit. On the basis of the outputs that are provided, which group of users will be able to communicate with the users on VLAN 10 on SW1? all the users who are connected only to SW2 users on VLAN 10 who are connected only to SW3 users on VLAN 10 who are connected only to SW4 users on VLAN 10 who are connected to both SW3 and SW4

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

43

Refer to the exhibit. Switches S2 and S3 are properly connected using an ethernet cable. A network administrator has configured both switches with VTP, but S3 is unable to propagate VLANs to S2. What could be the reason for this? The VTP configuration revision is different on both switches. The VTP domains are different on both switches. VTP pruning is disabled. VTP v2 is disabled.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.1.1 What is VTP?

44

Refer to the exhibit. The VTP domain has been configured as shown in the exhibit. The network technician accidentally configured the VTP server as a VTP client. After the technician reloaded the switches, all users in the VTP domain started to complain that they lost connectivity to the users on the same VLANs that are connected to other switches. What should be done in the future to prevent losing all

VLAN configurations in a VTP domain? Configure all switches in VTP transparent mode and copy the VLAN configuration into flash. Configure all switches in the network as VTP clients and copy the VLAN configuration into NVRAM. Create a new domain and configure a second switch as a VTP server to take over in case of a primary VTP server failure. In the same domain, configure a second switch as a VTP server to take over in case of a primary VTP server failure.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

45

Refer to the exhibit. Which two settings show the default value of VTP configuration on a Cisco 2960 switch? (Choose two.) revision number existing VLANs operating mode domain name pruning mode

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.1 Default VTP Configuration

46 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.2 Wireless LAN Standards

47 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? SSID OFDM WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

48 Which security protocol or measure would provide the greatest protection for a wireless LAN? WPA2 cloaking SSIDs shared WEP key MAC address filtering

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.2.2 Wireless Security Protocols

49 Which method establishes an administrative connection for configuring the Linksys WRT300N wireless access point? Associate with the access point and then open a HyperTerminal session with the access point. Physically connect to the access point and then reboot the computer to launch the configuration software. From a computer in the same IP subnet as the access point, enter the default IP address of the access

point in a web browser. Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer connected to the access point so that it exists on the same network, and then reboot your computer to establish a connection.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Access Point

50

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.4.2 Incorrect Channel Settings

LAN Switching and Wireless - FINAL 1


1

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to add IP phones to the network. To which devices should the IP phones connect? AS1 and AS2 DS1 and DS2 DS1, DS2, and CS1 AS1, AS2, DS1, and DS2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

2 What advantage does cut-through switching provide? It enables QoS It forwards frames quickly. It provides an analysis of frames. It allows reduction of traffic by using error checking to drop corrupt frames.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

3 Which switch forwarding method should be used on a network that employs frame classification based on an assigned Quality of Service (QoS) value? cut-through fast-forward fragment-free store-and-forward

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.2.1 Switch Forwarding Methods

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time

but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? only hosts A and B only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, B, C, and E

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.2 Design Considerations for Ethernet/802.3 Networks

Refer to the exhibit. The network consists of four hubs and a switch. The hosts connected to each hub are assigned addresses in the respective VLAN as shown. PC1 on VLAN 1 becomes infected with a virus and initiates a continuous IP broadcast. Which hubs will receive the broadcasts? Hub A Hubs A and B Hubs A and C Hubs A, B, C, and D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.2 Design Considerations for Ethernet/802.3 Networks

6 Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.) It is configured in VTP server mode. STP is automatically enabled. The first VTY line is automatically configured to allow remote connections. VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. The enable password is configured as cisco.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

7 What will be the effect of the command S1# copy system:running-config tftp://172.16.2.155/tokyo-config? The IOS will be copied to the TFTP server. The configuration file named tokyo-config will overwrite the startup configuration file on S1. The running configuration file on S1 will be saved via TFTP to a file named tokyo-config. The contents of NVRAM on S1 will become the startup configuration file on the tokyo switch.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator wants to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to Switch1. However, the SSH connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The RSA key has been removed. SSH has been configured on the wrong line. The transport input command is applied incorrectly. The domain name has been configured in the wrong configuration mode.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

9 What is the benefit of the auto-MDIX feature on a Cisco Catalyst switch? dynamically assigns a new management VLAN ID autonegotiates IP address information for initial management connections allows the use of straight-through patch cables regardless of connected device types

places a port immediately in the forwarding state to reduce the time for the spanning tree to reconverge

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

10

Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18. The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

11

Refer to the exhibit. The teacher host is connected to port Fa0/7 on switch STW. A student has decided to share access to the Internet by attaching a hub and laptop to STW as shown. What will be the result of the student making this connection? The Fa0/7 port of STW will be shutdown. The student will gain full access to the Internet. Both the teacher and student will be able to receive data but only the teacher will be able to send. The frames from the laptop will be dropped, but the teacher host will maintain connectivity with the network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

12 Which statement regarding the service password-encryption command is true? The service password-encryption command is entered at the privileged EXEC mode prompt. The service password-encryption command encrypts only passwords for the console and VTY ports. The service password-encryption command encrypts all previously unencrypted passwords in the running configuration. To see the passwords encrypted by the service password-encryption command, enter the no service password-encryption command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.1 Configure Password Options

13 A network administrator enables sticky learning on all access mode interfaces of a Catalyst switch, saves the configuration, then connects hosts to the switch. After the switch operates for several days, the administrator reboots the switch without saving the running configuration. What is the result? All previously learned MAC addresses are lost. The switch reverts to non-sticky dynamic learning. Connected hosts are no longer able to communicate with the switch. Previously learned sticky addresses are retained in the switch configuration.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

14

Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced?

Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.3 RSTP

15 What is a result of improperly implementing a network with redundancy at Layer 2? an increase of unicast and multicast errors at Layer 3 a decrease in the amount of broadcast traffic end device malfunction because of broadcast storms an increase in throughput at all points in the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.1.2 Issues with Redundancy

16

Why is it important that the network administrator consider the spanning-tree network diameter when choosing the root bridge? The network diameter limitation is 9. BPDUs may be discarded because of expiring timers. The cabling distance between the switches is 100 meters. The network diameter must be set to the number of meters of the cable between the root bridge and its farthest connected switch.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.5 STP Port States and BPDU Timers

17

Refer to the exhibit. What does "FORWARDING" mean in the command output shown? The switch is sending and receiving data frames. The switch is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. The switch is participating in an election process by forwarding the BPDUs it receives. The switch is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.5 STP Port States and BPDU Timers

18

Which device or devices should have the Spanning Tree Protocol enabled to prevent host traffic from creating a broadcast storm? Core_S1 Access_S2 and Access_S3 Core_S1, Access_S2, and Access_S3 Core_S1, Access_S2, Access_S3, and R1

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

19

Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology? Cat-A Cat-B Cat-C Cat-D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.4 Port Roles

20 RSTP is enabled in a switched network that is active and converged. Which switch port type assumes a discarding state on non-root switches? root port edge port alternate port designated port

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.6 RSTP Port States and Port Roles

21 In the implementation of PVST+ in a specific VLAN where all switches have default spanning tree priorities, which spanning-tree command setting could be assigned to force one of the Catalyst switches to become and remain the root bridge? root primary

priority 8192 priority 2048 spanning-tree mode rapid pvst

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.2 PVST+

22

Refer to the exhibit. All edge ports are configured with the spanning-tree portfast command. Host1 is recently connected to port Fa0/1 on switch SW1 . Which statement is true about the status of port Fa0/1? The port will transition into blocking state. The port will transition immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and then immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and immediately transition through the listening and learning states.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.4.9 Troubleshoot STP Operation

23 While monitoring LAN traffic, a network technician notices an excessive number of broadcasts. Which two steps could be included in the processes that are needed to reduce the number of broadcasts on the network? (Choose two.) Replace any existing hubs with switches. Add a Layer 3 device to route between networks. Subnet the existing IP network to create two networks. Increase the backbone speed by three times the current speed. Add additional switches and spread out the number of hosts evenly between them.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

24 How does a switch that is configured for 802.1Q trunking handle untagged frames that are received on a trunk port? The frames are dropped. The frames are assigned to the native VLAN. The frames are assigned to the default VLAN. The frames are assigned to the management VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.2 Types of VLANs

25

Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.5.3 Troubleshooting VLAN Configurations

26

Refer to the exhibit. The devices in the network are operational and configured as indicated in the exhibit. However, hosts B and D cannot ping each other. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The link between the switches is up but not trunked. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. Hosts B and D are configured with IP addresses from different subnets. VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 are not allowed on the trunk between the switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

27

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator issues the show interfaces fastEthernet 0/8 switchport command to check the status of the port. What can be concluded from the output? Port Fa0/8 is configured as a trunk with 802.1q encapsulation. Port Fa0/8 is configured as a trunk in VLAN 1. Port Fa0/8 is configured in access mode and associated with VLAN 1. Port Fa0/8 is configured as a trunk and VLAN 1 is a native VLAN for the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.3 Managing VLANs

28

Refer to the exhibit. SW-T has been configured with a single trunking interface. Which VLANs will be allowed across the trunk? Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. All configured VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. Only the the management and native VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only VLANs that are configured on the VTP server in the domain will be allowed across the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

29

Refer to the exhibit. How will switch S2 manage traffic coming from host PC1? S2 will drop the traffic, unless it is management traffic. S2 will tag the frame with VLAN ID 99 when it forwards it over the trunk link.

S2 will leave the traffic untagged when it forwards it over a trunk link. S2 will tag the traffic with the highest VLAN ID value when it forwards it over the trunk link.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

30 What is the purpose of VLAN trunking? It improves network performance by reducing broadcast traffic. It selects the best path to transmit data in a switched network. It carries the traffic of multiple VLANs through a single link. It avoids spanning tree loops in a switched network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

31 A network administrator implements inter-VLAN routing by configuring subinterfaces on a router. What is one important fact that must be considered?

The physical interface must have an IP address configured. The subinterface numbers must match the VLAN ID number. The no shutdown command must be issued on each subinterface. The IP address of each router subinterface must be used as the default gateway for hosts on the corresponding VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.2.2 Configure Router-on-a-Stick Inter-VLAN Routing

32

Refer to the exhibit. The hosts connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with the hosts in the same VLANs connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? Configure VLANs with different VLAN IDs on switch SW2. Reconfigure the trunk port on switch SW2 with static trunk configuration. Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability in the topology. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces used to connect SW1 and SW2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

33

Refer to the exhibit. Which three options correctly describe the router configuration that is shown? (Choose three.) An IEEE standard trunking protocol is in use. Interface Fa0/1 has been configured with subinterfaces. The shutdown command has been applied to interface Fa0/1. Interface Fa0/1.3 is mapped to the default management VLAN. The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design. An IP address should be applied to interface Fa0/1 for routing to occur.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

34

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 3. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.31 /28

192.168.1.32 /28 192.168.1.52 /28 192.168.1.63 /28

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

35

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator is configuring RT1 for inter-VLAN routing. The switch is configured correctly and is functional. Host1, Host2, and Host3 cannot communicate with each other. Based on the router configuration, what is causing the problem? Interface Fa0/0 is missing IP address configuration information. IP addresses on the subinterfaces are incorrectly matched to the VLANs. Each subinterface of Fa0/0 needs separate no shutdown commands. Routers do not support 892.1Q encapsulation on subinterfaces.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.2.2 Configure Router-on-a-Stick Inter-VLAN Routing

36

Refer to the exhibit. Router R1 is properly configured for router on a stick inter-VLAN routing, but PC1 is unable to ping PC2. What needs to be done to resolve the problem? Rename VLAN1. Connect one more port of S1 to R1. Configure the Fa0/1 port of S1 as a trunk port. Move the Fa0/0 interface of R1 to another VLAN.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

37

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are interconnected via a trunk link. Host A and host B are on the default VLAN but are not able to exchange traffic. What should be done to fix the problem? Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Remove the native VLAN from the trunk. Include a router or switch with Layer 3 capabilities. Configure the same native VLAN on both ends of the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

38

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs. The connected hosts can only access resources in their own VLAN. What is the most scalable and cost effective solution to allow inter-VLAN communication in this network? Replace S1 with a router that has one FastEthernet interface for each PC. Add a second switch and divide the PCs so that each VLAN is connected to its own switch. Configure a router with two subinterfaces on one of its FastEthernet ports and connect it to S1 using a trunk link. Connect a router to a port on S1 and assign the IP address of VLAN1 to the connecting router interface.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

39

Refer to the exhibit. This switch is to be added to the production network. Which two facts about VLANs and VTP operation can be confirmed by this output? (Choose two.) The network administrator will be able to configure VLANs of local significance on this switch. VLANs can only be added to the VLAN database on this switch by a VTP advertisement. All VLANs that are configured on this switch will be sent to all other switches in the same VTP domain. This switch will drop all VTP advertisements that come from switches that are configured in the same VTP domain. Adding this switch to the network will cause no disruption in the VTP domain operations if the rest of the switches in the same VTP domain have a higher configuration revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

40

Refer to the exhibit. VTP pruning is enabled in the VTP domain that is shown. How will switch ST-1 handle Layer 2 broadcast traffic originating from host A on switch ST-C? It will be dropped. It will be forwarded out port Fa0/5 only. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5 and Fa0/10. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5, Fa0/10, and Fa0/15.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

41 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it does not allow for the creation of local VLANs but it does accept VLAN updates from other switches in the same domain? client root server transparent

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.4 VTP Modes

42 The network administrator wants to configure a switch to pass VLAN update information to other switches in the domain but not update its own local VLAN database. Which two steps should the administrator perform to achieve this? (Choose two.) Reset the VTP counters. Configure VTP version 1 on the switch.

Configure the VTP mode of the switch to transparent. Verify that the switch has a higher configuration revision number. Configure the switch with the same VTP domain name as other switches in the network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.4 VTP Modes

43

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? Disable VTP pruning on SW2. Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

44

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem? All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

45

Refer to the exhibit. Switches S2 and S3 are properly connected using an ethernet cable. A network administrator has configured both switches with VTP, but S3 is unable to propagate VLANs to S2. What could be the reason for this? The VTP configuration revision is different on both switches. The VTP domains are different on both switches. VTP pruning is disabled.

VTP v2 is disabled.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.1.1 What is VTP?

46 A wireless LAN access point will convert traffic between which two frame encapsulation types? 802.1 and 802.11 802.3 and 802.11 802.3 and 802.16 802.5 and 802.16

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

47 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? SSID OFDM

WEP DSSS

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

48 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks? DSSS OFDM SSID WPA

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

49 Why is MAC address filtering considered a poor choice in securing a WLAN? Available bandwidth is reduced.

MAC addresses are easily spoofed. APs are more susceptible to DoS attacks. The payload encryption is easily broken.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.2.3 Securing a Wireless LAN

50

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.4.2 Incorrect Channel Settings

LAN Switching and Wireless - Practice Exam


1 A network technician is evaluating the desirable features of both access and distribution layer switches. Which two features are common to switches at these two layers? (Choose two.) QoS PoE port security link aggregation application based filtering

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 4 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.2.3 Switch Features in a Hierarchical Network

Refer to the exhibit. An administrator documented the output of a CAM table from an Ethernet switch as shown. What action will the switch take when it receives the frame shown at the bottom of the exhibit? discard the frame forward the frame out port 2

forward the frame out port 3 forward the frame out all ports forward the frame out all ports except port 3 add station 00-00-3D-1F-11-05 to port 2 in the forwarding table

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 5 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

3 A switch that is using port-based memory buffering receives two incoming frames on the same port. The destination port for the first frame that is received is busy. How will the switch handle the second frame that it received? The second frame will have to wait to be delivered even if its destination port is available. The second frame will be delivered to the memory buffer for its destination port. The second frame will be placed in a common memory buffer to await delivery. The second frame will be dropped.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.2.3 Memory Buffering

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B attempt to transmit a frame at the same time and a collision occurs. When will host D be able to transmit? immediately after sending its jam signal after host A and host B have completed transmission after the jam signal clears and its backoff delay expires

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.1.1 Key Elements of Ethernet/802.3 Networks

5 Where is the information of newly created VLANs stored on a switch? CPU flash NVRAM RAM

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.1 Introducing VLANs

6 Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.) Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled. Enable password is configured as cisco. All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. The flash directory contains the IOS image. VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. All interfaces are set to auto-negotiation of speed and duplex.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3, Option 4, and Option 6 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator enters the configuration shown to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to the switch. The Telnet connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The SSH version number is wrong. SSH has been configured on the wrong line.

Telnet and SSH cannot be configured simultaneously. The transport input command is configured incorrectly.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a "password required, but none set" message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem? The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

Refer to the exhibit. The switch VTY lines have been properly configured, but PC1 is unable to remotely manage the switch. How can this problem be resolved? Configure the Fa0/1 interface of the switch in trunk mode. Configure a default gateway on the switch. Configure the native VLAN on the switch. Configure the Fa0/1 interface of the switch to allow all VLANs.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.6 Basic Switch Configuration

10 A network administrator needs to save the configuration file currently in RAM to NVRAM before rebooting the switch. Which command should the administrator issue? Switch1# copy startup-config flash:filename Switch1# copy running-config startup-config Switch1# copy startup-config running-config Switch1# copy flash:config.txt running-config

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.3.8 Basic Switch Management

11 Which three statements are correct regarding passwords configured on a switch? (Choose three.) A different password can be set on each vty line. The enable password is used if the enable secret password is not set. The enable password command is more secure than the enable secret command. The service password-encryption command is entered in global configuration mode and only encrypts global configuration mode passwords. The service password-encryption command applies encryption to all passwords normally displayed in plain text by the show running-config command.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 2, and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.1 Configure Password Options

12

Refer to the exhibit. What happens when a frame from a source MAC address different from 00a8.d2e4.ba27 reaches switch port 0/5? The frame is dropped.

The port is shut down. An error message is displayed. FastEthernet port 0/5 will show an err-disabled message.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.6 Configuring Port Security

13 When configuring a router to act as an SSH server, what should be configured before issuing the crypto key generate rsa command? the security domain name the VTP domain name the IP domain name the host name

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 2.4.3 Configure Telnet and SSH

14

How does Spanning Tree Protocol aid network architecture? allows for redundant links by eliminating loops provides greater scalability by eliminating collisions reduces switch processor load by reducing broadcast traffic on trunk links reduces administrative overhead by sharing VLAN databases between switches across the network

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

15 Which type of frame contains information that is used in the election of the spanning tree root bridge? BID LSA LSU BPDU

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

16 What is the correct order in which the STP components are chosen? designated ports, nondesignated ports, root bridge, root ports nondesignated ports, designated ports, root ports, root bridge root bridge, root ports, designated ports, nondesignated ports root ports, root bridge, nondesignated ports, designated ports

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.3.1 STP Convergence

17

Refer to the exhibit. What does LEARNING mean as it relates to the Spanning Tree Protocol? The switch is sending and receiving data frames. The switch is not receiving BPDUs, but is sending and receiving data. The switch is participating in the election process by forwarding the BPDUs it receives. The switch is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.5 STP Port States and BPDU Timers

18 What can an administrator do to ensure that a specific switch will win a root election if all switches are set to their default configurations? Set the bridge priority to 16384. Change the VTP mode to server. Assign a port priority of 128 for all ports on the switch. Configure a loopback interface with the highest IP address.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.3 Bridge ID

19

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are configured with default bridge priority. Which port will act as the STP root port if all links are operating at the same bandwidth? Fa0/1 interface of S1 Fa0/2 interface of S1 Fa0/1 interface of S2 Fa0/2 interface of S2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.4 Port Roles

20 Which statement correctly describes the spanning-tree path cost? It is calculated based on the total number of switches connected in a loop. It is calculated based on the utilization of all the switches along a given path. It is calculated based on the bridge priority of the switches along a given path. It is calculated based on the sum of the port cost value, determined by link speed, for each switch port along a given path.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

21

Refer to the exhibit. Assuming the bridge priority values are set to default on all switches, which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology? Cat-A Cat-B

Cat-C Cat-D

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.3 Bridge ID

22

Refer to the exhibit. SW1 is a 2960 switch with default values assigned. Which two statements are true about what the cost value of 38 represents for SW1? (Choose two.) SW1 connects via two FastEthernet links to reach the root switch. The cost represents the numeric value for the fastest path from SW1 to the root switch. A cost of 38 is the value that is being advertised out port 26 on the upstream switch, which is closer to the root switch. SW1 adds the cost of a FastEthernet link to 38 to determine the total cost that is required to reach the root switch. The root switch is advertising a cost of 38, which is lower than any other switch that participates in the VLAN0001 spanning-tree domain. SW1 connects via a FastEthernet link to an upstream switch that in turn is directly connected to the root switch via a Gigabit Ethernet link.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 2 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 5.2.1 The Spanning Tree Algorithm

23

Refer to the exhibit. Computer A sends a broadcast message. Which devices will see the broadcast? computer B computer B and Router1 computer C and Router1 computer B, computer D, computer E and Router1 computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1 computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.4 Controlling Broadcast Domains with VLANs

24

Refer to the exhibit. What three statements describe why Host1 and Host2 are unable to communicate? (Choose three.)

The switch ports are on different VLANs. The switch IP address is on the wrong subnet. The hosts are configured on different logical networks. A router is required to forward traffic between Host1 and Host2. The VLAN port assignments must be contiguous for each VLAN. The host default gateway addresses must be on the same logical network.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1, Option 3, and Option 4 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 3

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.1 Introducing Inter-VLAN Routing

25

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 20. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 172.16.10.68 /27 172.16.10.99 /28 172.16.10.110 /27 172.16.30.96 /27 172.16.30.120 /28 172.16.30.146 /27

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

26 What is the purpose of the switch command switchport access vlan 99? to enable port security to make the port operational to assign the port to a particular VLAN to designate the VLAN that does not get tagged to assign the port to the native VLAN (VLAN 99)

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.2 Configure a VLAN

27

Refer to the exhibit. RTB is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. RTB can ping computer A but cannot ping computer B. What is a possible cause of this failure? Port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. RTB does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer B is in the wrong logical network.

Router interface Fa0/1 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.3.1 Switch Configuration Issues

28

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator issues the command shown on Switch1. What are two possible reasons that ports Fa0/1 through Fa0/4, and ports Fa0/11 and Fa0/12 do not show in the command output? (Choose two.) The ports have been configured as trunks. The ports have been assigned to the native VLAN. The VLAN that they are assigned to has been deleted. The ports currently do not have any devices plugged into them. The no shutdown command was not issued on these ports.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks * 3.3.3 Managing VLANs

29 What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value? All VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. The switches will negotiate via VTP which VLANs to allow across the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

30

Refer to the exhibit. Which statement is true regarding the information shown? Only one VLAN is currently configured to use the trunk links. The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. A Cisco proprietary protocol is in use for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. Interfaces Gi0/1 and Fa0/1 are allowed to carry data from multiple VLANs.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

31

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are configured as displayed and the native VLAN is the default. Which statement is true about the frames traveling between host A and host B? They will travel untagged. They will be tagged with VLAN ID 1. They will be tagged with the trunk Port VLAN ID. They will be tagged with the highest VLAN ID.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.1.2 Types of VLANs * 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks

32

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to implement inter-VLAN routing on a hierarchical network. On which devices should the inter-VLAN routing be configured? AS1 and AS2

DS1 and DS2 Gateway and CS1 Gateway, CS1, DS1, and DS2

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 1.1.1 The Hierarchical Network Model

33

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.1.2 Interfaces and Subinterfaces

34

Refer to the exhibit. The switches have been configured as shown. The hosts that are connected to switch 101-2FL are not able to communicate with the hosts in their corresponding VLANs that are connected to switch 101-3FL. What should be done to fix the problem? Configure port Fa0/2 on switch 101-3FL as a static trunk link. Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability into the topology. Utilize the switchport trunk allowed vlan all command on switch 101-3FL to permit the VLAN traffic. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces that are used to connect switches 101-2FL and 101-3FL.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

35

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator configures both switches as displayed. However, host C is unable to ping host D and host E is unable to ping host F. What action should the administrator take to enable this communication? Include a router in the topology. Associate hosts A and B with VLAN 10 instead of VLAN 1. Remove the native VLAN from the trunk.

Configure one trunk port in the dynamic desirable mode. Add the switchport nonegotiate command to the configuration of S2.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.3 Trunking Modes

36

Refer to the exhibit. The commands are entered into switch SW1 as shown, and an 802.1q trunk is successfully established. How does switch SW1 handle the untagged traffic that is destined for the trunk? SW1 will drop all untagged traffic. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 1. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 25. SW1 will send untagged traffic to all VLANs that are configured on the trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.2.1 VLAN Trunks * 3.3.4 Configure a Trunk

37

Refer to the exhibit. After receiving a console notification on Switch2, the network administrator begins to troubleshoot the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2. Which configuration change can be made to correct the problem with the trunk link? Set the Fa0/1 interface on Switch2 to trunk mode. Change the trunk encapsulation on Switch2 Fa0/1 to dot1q. Change the native VLAN on Switch2 interface Fa0/1 to VLAN 100. Change the access mode VLAN on Switch2 to the default VLAN 1.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 3.4.1 Common Problems with Trunks

38

Refer to the exhibit. Router R-West and switch S-West1 are connected via a single ethernet cable between the router interface fa0/0 and the switch interface fa0/1. The router and switch have been configured with the commands that are displayed in the exhibit. The network administrator enters the show interfaces trunk command and receives the output as shown. What is the cause of the "not-trunking" status for switch port Fa0/1? The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk. Because the router does not support Dynamic Trunking Protocol, the trunk has not been established.

The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for Dynamic Trunking Protocol to establish a trunk.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 6.2.2 Configure Router-on-a-Stick Inter-VLAN Routing

39

Refer to the exhibit. Which two facts can be confirmed by this output? (Choose two.) This switch shows no configuration revision errors. This switch has established two-way communication with the neighboring devices. This switch is configured to advertise its VLAN configuration to other VTP-enabled switches in the same VTP domain. This switch will drop all VTP advertisements that come from the switches that are configured in the same VTP domain. This switch will cause no disruption in the VTP domain operations if the rest of the switches in the same VTP domain have a higher configuration revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 3 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.3 Managing VLANs on a VTP Server

40

Refer to the exhibit. The switches are configured for VTP as shown. Which two statements correctly describe the operation of these switches? (Choose two.) A new VLAN can be added to Switch1 and that information will be added only to Switch2. A new VLAN can be added to Switch1 and that information will be added to Switch2 and Switch4. An existing VLAN can be deleted from Switch4 and that VLAN will be deleted from Switch1 and Switch2. An existing VLAN can be deleted from Switch2 and that VLAN will be deleted from Switch1 and Switch4. A new VLAN can be added to Switch4 and that information will be added to Switch1, Switch2, and Switch3. A new VLAN can be added to Switch3 and that information will be added to Switch1, Switch2, and Switch4.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 2 and Option 3 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.1.1 What is VTP?

41

Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. What will be pruned in the

VTP advertisements from switch ST-C to switch ST-1? VLAN 30 VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 VLAN 1, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30 VLAN 2 through VLAN 29, and VLAN 31 through VLAN 1000

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.5 VTP Pruning

42

Refer to the exhibit. Switches SW3 and SW4 are brand new switches with default configurations. The links between the switches are configured as trunk links and all VLANs are allowed on the trunks. On the basis of the show running-config output that is provided, which VLANs will be available on SW3 and SW4?

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2

0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.3 VTP Advertising

43 A network administrator is implementing VTP in a large campus LAN that contains one hundred switches. What are valid considerations for reliability and administration? Using server mode on a single master switch and client mode on all other switches will provide the most fault tolerance for retaining VLAN information in all switches if power is lost on the network. Using transparent mode on all switches will allow for efficient administration and prevent VLAN data loss from the loss of any single switch. Configuring several switches in server mode will allow all VLANs to be entered from a single switch and preserve VLAN data if any of the switches or connections are lost. Configuring one primary and one backup switch in server mode and all other switches in transparent mode will provide fault tolerance for the VLAN data and allow for efficient distribution of the VLAN configurations to all switches.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

44

Refer to the exhibit. Switch1 is configured for VTP as shown. An administrator connects four switches to Switch1 and configures trunk links between them. Which of the four switches will successfully receive and install VTP updates from Switch1?

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.2.4 VTP Modes * 4.3.1 Configuring VTP

45

Refer to the exhibit. The VTP domain has been configured as shown in the exhibit. None of the configured VLANs on SW1 and SW2 are present on SW3. What should be done to remedy the problem? Reconfigure switches SW2 and SW3 in VTP transparent mode. Reconfigure the VTP password to be consistent on all VTP switches. Reconfigure all switches as VTP clients to synchronize the VLAN database information. Reconfigure the VTP server as a VTP client and then return to VTP server mode to reset the configuration

revision number.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 4.3.2 Troubleshooting VTP Configurations

46 Which device must be installed in each computer to allow a wireless connection to be established? DSL modem wireless NIC wireless router wireless access point

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 2 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

47 Which two statements are correct about wireless infrastructure components? (Choose two.) An AP converts the TCP/IP data packets from their 802.11 frame encapsulation format to the 802.3 Ethernet frame format on the wired Ethernet network.

A wireless AP does not require any physical connection to allow wireless clients to access the Internet. An AP is a layer 2 device, similar to a switch, that provides dedicated bandwidth to each connected wireless host. Collisions do not occur between wireless NICs and APs. The wireless router performs the roles of AP and router.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response Option 1 and Option 5 are correct. 1 point for each correct option. 0 points if more options are selected than required. 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.3 Wireless Infrastructure Components

48 Which parameter is associated with wireless authentication? shared key SSID ad hoc channel

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 1 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

49

Refer to the graphic. In the Wireless menu option of a Linksys integrated router, what does the Network Mode option Mixed mean? The router supports encryption and authentication. The router supports both wired and wireless connections. The router supports 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n devices. The router supports connectivity through infrared and radio frequencies.

Observable Description Max Value 1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 3 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

* 7.1.4 Wireless Operation

50

Refer to the exhibit. A wireless infrastructure has been established in a company building as shown. The design goal was to allow roaming between the three APs for handheld devices. However, the devices lose connectivity when the users roam. How can this problem be fixed? Assign different SSIDs to each AP. Reconfigure all APs to the same channel. Use the same BSSID address for each AP. Reposition the APs so that each area of signal strength overlaps the neighbor by at least 10-15%.

Observable Description Max Value

1 correctness of response 2 points for Option 4 0 points for any other option 2

This item references content from the following areas:

CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless

Take Assessment ESwitching Final Exam CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless (Version 4.0) November 02, 2010 1

Refer to the exhibit. An administrator documented the output of a CAM table from an Ethernet switch as shown. What action will the switch take when it receives the frame shown at the bottom of the exhibit? discard the frame forward the frame out port 2 forward the frame out port 3 forward the frame out all ports forward the frame out all ports except port 3 add station 00-00-3D-1F-11-05 to port 2 in the forwarding table

Refer to the exhibit. An administrator issues the commands as shown on SwitchB. What is the result for port Fa0/22? The port is disabled. Security is enabled on the port.

The port becomes a trunk port. The port is now a member of the default VLAN.

3 What is one reason that SSID cloaking is not considered an effective security measure for awireless network? The SSID is not required to connect to a wireless network. The SSID is broadcast in probe messages from clients that are looking for the AP. The SSID is the same as the AP MAC address, which is sent in every message. An attacker can spoof the SSID simply by using an SSID of NULL in all messages.

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 192.168.1.11 /28 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.33 /28 192.168.1.44 /28 192.168.1.55 /28

While configuring a new switch, a network administrator configures the switch as an HTTP server. What benefits does this configuration provide? This allows the switch to host web pages for the network. This allows remote VPN connections to the switch over the Internet. This is required if a web server or web farm is attached to the switch. This allows web-based configuration tools to be used with the switch.

Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? QoS routing trunking VPN

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has designed and implemented a hierarchical network. What is the maximum network diameter between any two hosts on the network? five six ten twelve

8 A wireless client is attempting to establish a connection with a wireless access point. What process does the client use to discover the access points which are available to it? probing beaconing association authentication

9 What is the benefit of the auto-MDIX feature on a Cisco Catalyst switch? dynamically assigns a new management VLAN ID autonegotiates IP address information for initial management connections

allows the use of straight-through patch cables regardless of connected device types places a port immediately in the forwarding state to reduce the time for the spanning tree to reconverge

10

Refer to the exhibit. After the listed commands are entered into router R1 and switch S1, the administrator enters the show interface fa0/1 trunk and gets the results shown. What is the likely problem? The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk. The trunk has not been established because the router does not support dynamic trunking protocol. The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for dynamic trunking protocol to establish a trunk.

11

Refer to the exhibit. The hosts connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with the hosts in the same VLANs connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? Configure VLANs with different VLAN IDs on switch SW2. Reconfigure the trunk port on switch SW2 with static trunk configuration. Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability in the topology. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces used to connect SW1 and SW2.

12 What is the purpose of the switch command switchport access vlan 99?

to enable port security to make the port operational to assign the port to a particular VLAN to designate the VLAN that does not get tagged

to assign the port to the native VLAN (VLAN 99)

13

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are true about the operation of the interfaces? (Choose two.) Incoming traffic with VLAN ID 0 is processed by interface fa0/0. Incoming traffic that has a VLAN ID of 2 is processed by subinterface fa0/0.2. Both subinterfaces remain up with line protocol up, even if fa0/0 line protocol is down. Subinterfaces use unique MAC addresses by adding the 802.1Q VLAN ID to the hardware address. Traffic inbound on this router is processed by different subinterfaces, depending on the VLAN from which the traffic originated.

14

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to download a previously saved configuration file from the TFTP server to Switch1. Which command will accomplish this task? Switch1# copy tftp://192.168.0.253/backup-confg nvram:startup-config Switch1# copy tftp://192.168.0.254/backup-confg nvram:startup-config Switch1# copy nvram:startup-config tftp://192.168.0.253/backup-config Switch1# copy nvram:startup-config tftp://192.168.0.254/backup-config

15 What happens when the crypto key zeroize rsa command is entered on a switch configured with the transport input ssh command on the vty lines? A new RSA key pair is created. The switch defaults to allowing Telnet connections only. The switch is no longer able to make SSH connections as an SSH client. The switch allows remote connections only after a new RSA key pair is generated. Take Assessment ESwitching Final Exam CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless www.ccna4u.org (Version 4.0)

16 Which statement about STP network diameter is correct? STP diameters are restricted by convergence times. Layer 2 root elections should be optimized by adjusting BPDU timers to match network diameter. Using lower bandwidth connections between switches will allow STP to have a larger network diameter.

Portfast can be used to increase the allowable switched network diameter because it disables the forward delay and maximum age timers.

17 In the implementation of PVST+ in a specific VLAN where all switches have default spanning tree priorities, which spanning-tree command setting could be assigned to force one of the Catalyst switches to become and remain the root bridge? root primary priority 8192 priority 2048 spanning-tree mode rapid pvst

18

Refer to the exhibit. A new switch, SW3, has been added to the network. The network administrator determines that VLAN information is not propagating to SW3. Which command will remedy the problem? SW1(config)# vtp version 1 SW2(config)# vtp mode client SW3(config)# vtp domain Cisco1 SW3(config)# vtp mode transparent

19 In an attempt to improve switch performance, a network administrator changes the MAC aging time to ten seconds. What is a likely result of this decision? The MAC table will fill with unused addresses. Address conflicts will cause retransmission errors. Unnecessary flooding will slow network performance. Timely MAC address updates will ensure rapid delivery of frames.

20 What is an efficient and cost effective way to minimize the frequency and effects of broadcast storms on an Ethernet LAN? Connect each PC directly to a router port. Use access control lists to filter broadcasts from the network. Divide the computers into separate VLANs on the existing switches. Divide the computers into separate workgroups using different physical switches.

21 Which value determines if a switch becomes the central point of reference in the spanning tree topology? lowest bridge ID highest revision number lowest numeric IP address highest numeric MAC address

22

Refer to the exhibit. What is the maximum number of VLANs that can be deleted from the Switch as it is configured? zero four five eight nine

23

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem? All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain.

VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

24

Refer to the exhibit. All edge ports are configured with the spanning-tree portfast command. Host1 is recently connected to port Fa0/1 on switch SW1 . Which statement is true about the status of port Fa0/1? The port will transition into blocking state. The port will transition immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and then immediately into forwarding state. The port will transition into blocking state and immediately transition through the listening and learning states.

25

Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18.

The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.

26 Which type of traffic can still be received on a switch interface that is in STP blocking mode? BPDU frames multicast frames broadcast frames Layer 3 packets

27

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts B and C attempt to transmit a frame at the same time, but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? all hosts that are shown only hosts B and C only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, D, E, and F only hosts D, E, and F

28 Which security protocol or measure would provide the greatest protection for a wireless LAN? WPA2 cloaking SSIDs

shared WEP key MAC address filtering

29

Refer to the exhibit. Which statement is true about the status of interface Fa0/1? The interface is not configured to transmit data. The interface is configured to transmit data at 10 Mb/s speed. The interface is configured to transmit data in half-duplex mode. The interface is configured to use HDLC encapsulation to transmit data.

30 What is the purpose of configuring a switch port as a trunk port? to control the broadcast domain size to eliminate the collisions that result from multiple VLANs to transmit data from multiple VLANs through a single port to increase the bandwidth between the switch and its upstream device

31 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? client root server transparent

32 When implementing a router-on-a-stick, what must be configured on the router to ensure connectivity between different VLANs? subinterfaces routing protocol switched virtual circuits dynamic trunking protocol

33

Refer to the exhibit. VTP pruning is enabled in the VTP domain that is shown. How will switch ST-1 handle Layer 2 broadcast traffic originating from host A on switch ST-C? It will be dropped.

It will be forwarded out port Fa0/5 only. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5 and Fa0/10. It will be forwarded out ports Fa0/5, Fa0/10, and Fa0/15.

34

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to add IP phones to the network. To which devices should the IP phones connect? AS1 and AS2 DS1 and DS2 DS1, DS2, and CS1 AS1, AS2, DS1, and DS2

35

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values? switch A switch B switch C switch D switch E switch F 36 Why is MAC address filtering considered a poor choice in securing a WLAN? Available bandwidth is reduced.

MAC addresses are easily spoofed. APs are more susceptible to DoS attacks. The payload encryption is easily broken.

37

Refer to the exhibit. What are two reasons for the Fa0/24 port being placed in the blocking state? (Choose two.) This switch is not the root bridge. The Fa0/24 port is administratively down. STP has detected links that create a loop. There is a change in the VTP configuration. The Fa0/24 port is overloaded with too much traffic for its configured bandwidth.

38

Refer to the exhibit. Which two settings show the default value of VTP configuration on a Cisco 2960 switch? (Choose two.) revision number existing VLANs operating mode domain name

pruning mode

39 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size at the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem? The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer.

40

Refer to the exhibit. Which Spanning Tree Protocol version is in effect? Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) Per VLAN Spanning Tree + (PVST+) Common Spanning Tree (CST) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

41

Refer to the exhibit. All switch interfaces are members of the same VLAN. What information is used by Switch1 to determine if incoming frames from the hosts should be forwarded to Router1? the source address field in the IP header the destination port number in the TCP header the destination address field in the Layer 3 header the destination address field in the Ethernet header

42

Refer to the exhibit. The configuration steps that are listed in the exhibit have been entered in switch S1 via the console. Subsequent attempts to telnet to the switch are not successful. What is causing the problem? The switch must be configured with SSH version 1. The transport input command must specify Telnet access. The RSA keys must be returned to zero before SSH will permit Telnet access. The ip domain-name command must also be entered in line configuration mode for the vty lines.

43 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks? DSSS OFDM SSID WPA

44 How does a switch that is configured for 802.1Q trunking handle untagged frames that are received on a trunk port? The frames are dropped. The frames are assigned to the native VLAN. The frames are assigned to the default VLAN.

The frames are assigned to the management VLAN.

45 Why is it advisable that a network administrator use SSH instead of Telnet when managing switches? SSH uses TCP whereas Telnet does not. SSH encrypts only the username and password when logging in. SSH encrypts all remote management communications whereas Telnet does not. SSH sends a clear text message steam which reduces the bandwidth use for management. 46 What are two requirements for configuring inter-VLAN routing using the router-on-a-stick model? (Choose two.) Each subinterface should be configured with its own IP address, subnet mask, and unique VLAN assignment. The physical interface of the router must be connected to a trunk link on the adjacent switch. The number of physical interfaces on the router should match the number of VLANs. Different static VLANs should be assigned to different interfaces of the router. The router should be configured as the VTP server.

47

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Preinstallation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

48 What is a function or characteristic of the native VLAN? It is the VLAN that supports untagged traffic on an 802.1Q trunk. It is always assigned to VLAN 1 for backward compatibility. It is always the same VLAN number for all trunks within an organization. It is used as the management VLAN throughout the entire switched network.

49

Refer to the exhibit. Which three options correctly describe the router configuration that is shown? (Choose three.) An IEEE standard trunking protocol is in use. Interface Fa0/1 has been configured with subinterfaces. The shutdown command has been applied to interface Fa0/1. Interface Fa0/1.3 is mapped to the default management VLAN. The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design. An IP address should be applied to interface Fa0/1 for routing to occur.

50

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting.

51 What is the purpose of VTP pruning? to restrict traffic on specified trunk lines to designate switches that do not participate in VTP to advertise VTP domain information to specified switches only to reduce the propagation of VTP advertisements in the switched network

52

What operational change will occur if an 802.11b client associates with an access point that is currently supporting clients utilizing 802.11g? The 802.11g clients will disassociate from the AP. The 802.11g clients will operate at reduced speeds. The 802.11b client will never gain access to the channel. The 802.11b client will not be able to establish an IP session with any of the other 802.11g clients.

1.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator needs to setup Switch1 for remote access from HostA. Theshow ip interface brief is issued on Router1 and the show interfaces trunk command is issued on theSwitch1 to verify the current status. The administrator applies the additional configuration shown in theexhibit to Switch1. However, the telnet from HostA fails. What additional commands need to be appliedto the switch? & Switch(config)# interface vlan 1 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.1.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 1 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.50.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.50.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 10 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.10.250 255.255.255.0

Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 10 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.1.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 50 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.10.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 2.

Refer to the exhibit. On the basis of the configuration shown, how will an Ethernet frame on port GigabitEthernet0/1 be modified? & 802.1Q encapsulation prepends a 4-byte tag field in front of the original Ethernet frame and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. & 802.1Q encapsulation inserts a 4-byte tag field into the original Ethernet frame between the source address and type/length fields and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. & 802.1Q encapsulation prepends an 802.1p field in front of the original Ethernet frame and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. & 802.1Q encapsulation inserts an 802.1p field into the original Ethernet frame between the source address and type/length fields and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. 3. What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value? & All VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. & Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. & Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. & The switches will negotiate via VTP which VLANs to allow across the trunk. 4. Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? & SSID & OFDM & WEP & DSSS

5.

Refer to the exhibit. What is the consequence if SW1 port F0/1 is configured as an edge port? & SW1 port F0/1 transitions to the learning state. & SW1 port F0/1 can generate a temporary loop. & SW1 port F0/1 becomes a non-designated port. & SW1 port F0/2 no longer passes BPDUs to SW4. 6.

Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? & QoS & routing & trunking & VPN 7.

Refer to the exhibit. Spanning-tree port priorities are 128 for all interfaces. The network administrator enters the spanning-tree vlan 1 root primary command on S4. Which two port results are correct? (Choose two.) & S1 Gi0/1 becomes a root port. & S2 Gi0/2 becomes a non-designated port. & S3 Gi0/1 becomes a non-designated port. & S4 Gi0/1 becomes a root port. & S4 Gi0/2 becomes a designated port. 8.

Refer to the exhibit. Which two facts can be confirmed by this output? (Choose two.) & This switch shows no configuration revision errors. & This switch has established two-way communication with the neighboring devices. & This switch is configured to advertise its VLAN configuration to other VTP-enabled

switches in the same VTP domain. & This switch will drop all VTP advertisements that come from the switches that are configured in the same VTP domain. & This switch will cause no disruption in the VTP domain operations if the rest of the switches in the same VTP domain have a higher configuration revision number. 9.

Refer to the exhibit. R1 is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. R1 can ping computer 3 but cannot ping computer 1. What is a possible cause for this failure? & S1 port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. & R1 does not have an active routing protocol. & The IP address of computer 1 is in the wrong logical network. & Router interface Fa0/0 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured. 10.

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are interconnected via a trunk link. Host A and host B are on the default VLAN but are not able to exchange traffic. What should be done to fix the problem? & Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. & Remove the native VLAN from the trunk. & Include a router or switch with Layer 3 capabilities. & Configure the same native VLAN on both ends of the trunk. 11.

Refer to the exhibit. The hosts connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with the hosts in the same VLANs connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? & Configure VLANs with different VLAN IDs on switch SW2. & Reconfigure the trunk port on switch SW2 with static trunk configuration. & Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability in the topology. & Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces used to connect SW1 and SW2. 12. What happens when the crypto key zeroize rsa command is entered on a switch configured with the transport input ssh command on the vty lines? & A new RSA key pair is created. & The switch defaults to allowing Telnet connections only. & The switch is no longer able to make SSH connections as an SSH client. & The switch allows remote connections only after a new RSA key pair is generated. 13.

Refer to the exhibit. An Ethernet switch has developed the CAM table shown. What action will the switch take when it receives the frame shown at the bottom of the exhibit? & forward the frame out all interfaces except Interface3 & add station 00-00-3D-1F-11-05 to Interface2 in the forwarding table & forward the frame out Interface3 & discard the frame & forward the frame out all interfaces & forward the frame out Interface2 14. Which two statements describe Spanning Tree Protocol? (Choose two.) & It eliminates Layer 2 loops in network topologies. & It eliminates the need for redundant physical paths in network topologies. & It can only be used in networks in which Layer 2 switching is in use. & It can only be used in networks where both routers and switches are used together. & It can only be used in networks where routers are installed. 15.

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP addresses should be assigned to this new host? & 192.168.1.11 /28

& & & &

192.168.1.22 192.168.1.33 192.168.1.44 192.168.1.55

/28 /28 /28 /28

16.

Refer to the exhibit. How does SW1 manage traffic coming from Host A? & SW1 drops the traffic because it is untagged. & SW1 leaves the traffic untagged and forwards it over the trunk. & SW1 tags the traffic with the lowest VLAN ID value and forwards it over the trunk link. & SW1 encapsulates the traffic with 802.1Q encapsulation and forwards it over the trunk link. 17. Refer to the exhibit. The switches are configured for VTP as shown. Which two statements correctly describe the operation of these switches? (Choose two.) & A new VLAN can be added to Switch1 and that information will be added only to Switch2.

& A new VLAN can be added to Switch1 and that information will be added to Switch2 and Switch4. & An existing VLAN can be deleted from Switch4 and that VLAN will be deleted from Switch1 and Switch2. & An existing VLAN can be deleted from Switch2 and that VLAN will be deleted from Switch1 and Switch4. & A new VLAN can be added to Switch4 and that information will be added to Switch1, Switch2, and Switch3. & A new VLAN can be added to Switch3 and that information will be added to Switch1, Switch2, and Switch4. 18.

Refer to the exhibit. Computer A sends a broadcast message. Which devices will see the broadcast? & computer B & computer B and Router1 & computer C and Router1 & computer B, computer D, computer E and Router1 & computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1 & computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1 19.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator enters the configuration shown to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to the switch. The Telnet connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem? & The SSH version number is wrong. & SSH has been configured on the wrong line. & Telnet and SSH cannot be configured simultaneously. & The transport input command is configured incorrectly. 20.

Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology? & Cat-A & Cat-B & Cat-C & Cat-D 21.

Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. Which VLANs will be pruned from switch SW3? & VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 & VLAN 1, VLAN 10, and VLAN 20 & VLAN 1, VLAN 1002 through 1005 & VLAN 1, VLAN 10, VLAN 20, VLAN 1002 through 1005 22.

Refer to the exhibit. What does STATIC indicate in the output that is shown? & The switch will not allow any other device to connect to port Fa0/15. & Traffic destined for MAC address 0000.c123.5432 will be forwarded to Fa0/15. & This entry will be removed and refreshed every 300 seconds to keep it in the table. & The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/15. & When processing a frame, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port.

23. Which three statements are regarding router-on-a-stick inter-VLAN routing? (Choose three.) & requires the use of subinterfaces on the router & requires an access link between the router and Layer 2 switch & more cost-efficient and scalable than using multiple physical interfaces & requires each subinterface to be configured with the no shutdown command & can impact performance if many VLANs compete for bandwidth on a single router interface & makes troubleshooting the inter-VLAN routing configuration much less complex than when using multiple physical interfaces 24.

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. & The router will ignore the packet because the source and destination are on the same broadcast domain. & The router will drop the packet since no network that includes the source address is attached to the router. 25.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator needs to remove the east-hosts VLAN and use the switch port from that VLAN in one of the existing VLANs. What two commands should be used when completely removing VLAN 2 from S1-Central while leaving the switch and all its interfaces operational? (Choose two.) & S1-Central# reload & S1-Central# erase flash: & S1-Central(config)# no vlan 2 & S1-Central# delete flash:vlan.dat & S1-Central(config-if)# switchport access vlan 3 26.

Refer to the exhibit. What does "FORWARDING" mean in the command output shown? & The switch is sending and receiving data frames. & The switch is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. & The switch is participating in an election process by forwarding the BPDUs it

receives. & The switch is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data. 27.

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? & Disable VTP pruning on SW2. & Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. & Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. & Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number. 28. What are three benefits of a hierarchical network model? (Choose three.) & reduced contention for bandwidth & reduced size of the physical layout & increased fault tolerance of the network & elimination of the need for wiring closets & elimination of the need for layer three functionality & simplification of management and troubleshooting 29.

Refer to the exhibit. Which three options correctly identify information that could be associated with this output?(Choose three.) & Interface FastEthernet3/0/0 is subinterfaced. & A non-proprietary trunking protocol is in use. & The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design. & A shutdown command has been applied to interface FastEthernet3/0/0. & Interface FastEthernet3/0/0.3 is mapped to the default management VLAN. & An IP address should be applied to FastEthernet3/0/0 for correct data routing. 30.

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network.

What could be the source of the problem? & All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. & SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. & VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. & The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain. 31.

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to implement inter-VLAN routing on a hierarchical network. On which devices should the inter-VLAN routing be configured? & AS1 and AS2 & DS1 and DS2 & Gateway and CS1 & Gateway, CS1, DS1, and DS2 32. Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.) & Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled. & Enable password is configured as cisco. & All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. & The flash directory contains the IOS image. & VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. & All interfaces are set to auto-negotiation of speed and duplex. 33.

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) & After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. & Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. & The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. & Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. & If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting. 34.

Refer to the exhibit. After the listed commands are entered into router R1 and switch S1, the administrator enters the show interface fa0/1 trunk and gets the results shown. What is the likely problem? & The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. & The trunk has not been established because the router does not support dynamic trunking protocol. & The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for dynamic trunking protocol to establish a trunk. & The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk. 35.

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are about the operation of the interfaces? (Choose two.) & Incoming traffic with VLAN ID 0 is processed by interface fa0/0. & Incoming traffic that has a VLAN ID of 2 is processed by subinterface fa0/0.2. & Both subinterfaces remain up with line protocol up, even if fa0/0 line protocol is down. & Subinterfaces use unique MAC addresses by adding the 802.1Q VLAN ID to the hardware address. & Traffic inbound on this router is processed by different subinterfaces, depending on the VLAN from which the traffic originated. 36. What three tasks should be performed before moving a Catalyst switch to another VTP management domain? (Choose three.) & Select the correct VTP mode and version. & Configure the switch with the name of the new management domain. & Download the VTP database from the VTP server in the new domain. & Configure the VTP server in the new domain to recognize the BID of the switch. & Reset the VTP counters to allow the switch to synchronize with the other switches in the new domain.

& Verify that the switch has a lower configuration revision number than the other switches in the new domain. 37.

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? & only hosts A and B & only hosts A, B, and C & only hosts A, B, C, and D & only hosts A, B, C, and E 38. Which statement regarding the service password-encryption command is ? & The service password-encryption command is entered at the privileged EXEC mode prompt. & The service password-encryption command encrypts only passwords for the console and VTY ports. & The service password-encryption command encrypts all previously unencrypted passwords in the running configuration. & To see the passwords encrypted by the service password-encryption command, enter the no service password-encryption command. 39.

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are regarding what the cost value of 23 represents for Switch4? (Choose two.) & This cost represents the lowest cost path for Switch4 to the root switch. & A cost of 23 is the value being advertised out port 16 on the switch upstream (closer) to the root switch. & Switch4 adds the cost of a Fast Ethernet link to 23 to determine its total cost to reach the root switch. & Switch4 is connected via a Fast Ethernet link to an upstream switch that in turn is directly connected to the root switch via a Gigabit Ethernet link. & The root switch is advertising a cost of 23, which is lower than any other switch in the VLAN0001 spanning-tree domain. 40.

Refer to the exhibit. What three statements describe why Host1 and Host2 are unable to communicate? (Choose three.) & The switch ports are on different VLANs. & The switch IP address is on the wrong subnet. & The hosts are configured on different logical networks. & A router is required to forward traffic between Host1 and Host2. & The VLAN port assignments must be contiguous for each VLAN. & The host default gateway addresses must be on the same logical network. 41.

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values? & switch A & switch B & switch C & switch D & switch E & switch F 42.

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts PC_A and PC_B send traffic simultaneously, and the frames from the transmitting stations collide. What is the last device to receive the collision? & hub HB1 & switch SW1 & router R1 & switch SW2 & router R2 & switch SW4 43. Why is it important that the network administrator consider the spanning-tree

network diameter when choosing the root bridge? & The network diameter limitation is 9. & BPDUs may be discarded because of expiring timers. & The cabling distance between the switches is 100 meters. & The network diameter must be set to the number of meters of the cable between the root bridge and its farthest connected switch. 44.

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured Router1 for inter-VLAN routing. A test of the network, however, shows that hosts on each VLAN can only access local resources and not resources on the other VLAN. What is the most likely cause of this problem? & Switch port Fa0/1 is not trunking. & Router interface Fa0/0 is possibly down. & No routing protocol is configured on Router1. & One of the router subinterfaces is possibly down. 45. What is the purpose of issuing the command switchport mode access on a switch interface? & disable port security & make the port operational & override the default port behavior & force the port to be a part of a single vlan 46.

Refer to the exhibit. Which statement is regarding the information shown? & Only one VLAN is currently configured to use the trunk links. & The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. & A Cisco proprietary protocol is in use for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. & Interfaces Gi0/1 and Fa0/1 are allowed to carry data from multiple VLANs 47. Which identifier is used to keep track of frames that are destined for a particular wireless client? & AID & SSID & BSSID & ESSID 48.

Refer to the exhibit. What will happen when frames that contain an unknown source address reach interface fa0/24? & A syslog message will be logged. & Fa0/24 will become error-disabled. & The incoming frames will be dropped. & The security violation count will be incremented. 49. In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? & client & root & server & transparent 50. Which method establishes an administrative connection for configuring the Linksys WRT300N wireless access point?

& Associate with the access point and then open a HyperTerminal session with the access point. & Physically connect to the access point and then reboot the computer to launch the configuration software. & From a computer in the same IP subnet as the access point, enter the default IP address of the access point in a web browser. & Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer connected to the access point so that it exists on the same network, and then reboot your computer to establish a connection. 51. What two methods can be used to remove MAC address table entries from a switch? (Choose two.) & Power cycle the switch to clear all dynamically learned addresses & The clear switching-tables command will remove statically configured entries. & The clear mac-address-table command will remove statically and dynamically configured table entries. & The erase flash command will clear all statically configured table entries. & Statically configured MAC addresses will automatically be removed from the address table 300 minutes after the last activity on a switch port. 52. What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) & requires less equipment & provides improved range & permits increased data rates & has a single-input and a single-output & needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

1.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator needs to setup Switch1 for remote access from HostA. Theshow ip interface brief is issued on Router1 and the show interfaces trunk command is issued on theSwitch1 to verify the current status. The administrator applies the additional configuration shown in theexhibit to Switch1. However, the telnet from HostA fails. What additional commands need to be appliedto the switch? & Switch(config)# interface vlan 1 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.1.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 1 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.50.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.50.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 10 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.10.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 10 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.1.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 & Switch(config)# interface vlan 50 Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.10.250 255.255.255.0 Switch(config-if)# no shutdown Switch(config-if)# ip default-gateway 10.1.10.254 2.

Refer to the exhibit. On the basis of the configuration shown, how will an Ethernet frame on port GigabitEthernet0/1 be modified? & 802.1Q encapsulation prepends a 4-byte tag field in front of the original Ethernet frame and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. & 802.1Q encapsulation inserts a 4-byte tag field into the original Ethernet frame between the source address and type/length fields and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. & 802.1Q encapsulation prepends an 802.1p field in front of the original Ethernet frame and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. & 802.1Q encapsulation inserts an 802.1p field into the original Ethernet frame between the source address and type/length fields and recomputes the frame check sequence (FCS) on the modified frame. 3. What VLANs are allowed across a trunk when the range of allowed VLANs is set to the default value? & All VLANs will be allowed across the trunk. & Only VLAN 1 will be allowed across the trunk. & Only the native VLAN will be allowed across the trunk. & The switches will negotiate via VTP which VLANs to allow across the trunk. 4. Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? & SSID & OFDM & WEP & DSSS 5.

Refer to the exhibit. What is the consequence if SW1 port F0/1 is configured as an edge port? & SW1 port F0/1 transitions to the learning state. & SW1 port F0/1 can generate a temporary loop. & SW1 port F0/1 becomes a non-designated port. & SW1 port F0/2 no longer passes BPDUs to SW4. 6.

Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? & QoS & routing & trunking & VPN 7.

Refer to the exhibit. Spanning-tree port priorities are 128 for all interfaces. The network administrator enters the spanning-tree vlan 1 root primary command on S4. Which two port results are correct? (Choose two.) & S1 Gi0/1 becomes a root port. & S2 Gi0/2 becomes a non-designated port. & S3 Gi0/1 becomes a non-designated port. & S4 Gi0/1 becomes a root port. & S4 Gi0/2 becomes a designated port. 8.

Refer to the exhibit. Which two facts can be confirmed by this output? (Choose two.) & This switch shows no configuration revision errors. & This switch has established two-way communication with the neighboring devices. & This switch is configured to advertise its VLAN configuration to other VTP-enabled

switches in the same VTP domain. & This switch will drop all VTP advertisements that come from the switches that are configured in the same VTP domain. & This switch will cause no disruption in the VTP domain operations if the rest of the switches in the same VTP domain have a higher configuration revision number. 9.

Refer to the exhibit. R1 is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. R1 can ping computer 3 but cannot ping computer 1. What is a possible cause for this failure? & S1 port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. & R1 does not have an active routing protocol. & The IP address of computer 1 is in the wrong logical network. & Router interface Fa0/0 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured. 10.

Refer to the exhibit. Both switches are interconnected via a trunk link. Host A and host B are on the default VLAN but are not able to exchange traffic. What should be done to fix the problem? & Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. & Remove the native VLAN from the trunk. & Include a router or switch with Layer 3 capabilities. & Configure the same native VLAN on both ends of the trunk. 11.

Refer to the exhibit. The hosts connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with the hosts in the same VLANs connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? & Configure VLANs with different VLAN IDs on switch SW2. & Reconfigure the trunk port on switch SW2 with static trunk configuration. & Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability in the topology. & Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces used to connect SW1 and SW2. 12. What happens when the crypto key zeroize rsa command is entered on a switch configured with the transport input ssh command on the vty lines? & A new RSA key pair is created. & The switch defaults to allowing Telnet connections only. & The switch is no longer able to make SSH connections as an SSH client. & The switch allows remote connections only after a new RSA key pair is generated. 13.

Refer to the exhibit. An Ethernet switch has developed the CAM table shown. What action will the switch take when it receives the frame shown at the bottom of the exhibit? & forward the frame out all interfaces except Interface3 & add station 00-00-3D-1F-11-05 to Interface2 in the forwarding table & forward the frame out Interface3 & discard the frame & forward the frame out all interfaces & forward the frame out Interface2 14. Which two statements describe Spanning Tree Protocol? (Choose two.) & It eliminates Layer 2 loops in network topologies. & It eliminates the need for redundant physical paths in network topologies. & It can only be used in networks in which Layer 2 switching is in use. & It can only be used in networks where both routers and switches are used together. & It can only be used in networks where routers are installed. 15.

Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP addresses should be assigned to this new host? & 192.168.1.11 /28

& & & &

192.168.1.22 192.168.1.33 192.168.1.44 192.168.1.55

/28 /28 /28 /28

16.

Refer to the exhibit. How does SW1 manage traffic coming from Host A? & SW1 drops the traffic because it is untagged. & SW1 leaves the traffic untagged and forwards it over the trunk. & SW1 tags the traffic with the lowest VLAN ID value and forwards it over the trunk link. & SW1 encapsulates the traffic with 802.1Q encapsulation and forwards it over the trunk link. 17. Refer to the exhibit. The switches are configured for VTP as shown. Which two statements correctly describe the operation of these switches? (Choose two.) & A new VLAN can be added to Switch1 and that information will be added only to Switch2.

& A new VLAN can be added to Switch1 and that information will be added to Switch2 and Switch4. & An existing VLAN can be deleted from Switch4 and that VLAN will be deleted from Switch1 and Switch2. & An existing VLAN can be deleted from Switch2 and that VLAN will be deleted from Switch1 and Switch4. & A new VLAN can be added to Switch4 and that information will be added to Switch1, Switch2, and Switch3. & A new VLAN can be added to Switch3 and that information will be added to Switch1, Switch2, and Switch4. 18.

Refer to the exhibit. Computer A sends a broadcast message. Which devices will see the broadcast? & computer B & computer B and Router1 & computer C and Router1 & computer B, computer D, computer E and Router1 & computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1 & computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E and Router1 19.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator enters the configuration shown to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to the switch. The Telnet connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem? & The SSH version number is wrong. & SSH has been configured on the wrong line. & Telnet and SSH cannot be configured simultaneously. & The transport input command is configured incorrectly. 20.

Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the spanning tree topology? & Cat-A & Cat-B & Cat-C & Cat-D 21.

Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. Which VLANs will be pruned from switch SW3? & VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 & VLAN 1, VLAN 10, and VLAN 20 & VLAN 1, VLAN 1002 through 1005 & VLAN 1, VLAN 10, VLAN 20, VLAN 1002 through 1005 22.

Refer to the exhibit. What does STATIC indicate in the output that is shown? & The switch will not allow any other device to connect to port Fa0/15. & Traffic destined for MAC address 0000.c123.5432 will be forwarded to Fa0/15. & This entry will be removed and refreshed every 300 seconds to keep it in the table. & The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/15. & When processing a frame, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port.

23. Which three statements are regarding router-on-a-stick inter-VLAN routing? (Choose three.) & requires the use of subinterfaces on the router & requires an access link between the router and Layer 2 switch & more cost-efficient and scalable than using multiple physical interfaces & requires each subinterface to be configured with the no shutdown command & can impact performance if many VLANs compete for bandwidth on a single router interface & makes troubleshooting the inter-VLAN routing configuration much less complex than when using multiple physical interfaces 24.

Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. & The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. & The router will ignore the packet because the source and destination are on the same broadcast domain. & The router will drop the packet since no network that includes the source address is attached to the router. 25.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator needs to remove the east-hosts VLAN and use the switch port from that VLAN in one of the existing VLANs. What two commands should be used when completely removing VLAN 2 from S1-Central while leaving the switch and all its interfaces operational? (Choose two.) & S1-Central# reload & S1-Central# erase flash: & S1-Central(config)# no vlan 2 & S1-Central# delete flash:vlan.dat & S1-Central(config-if)# switchport access vlan 3 26.

Refer to the exhibit. What does "FORWARDING" mean in the command output shown? & The switch is sending and receiving data frames. & The switch is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. & The switch is participating in an election process by forwarding the BPDUs it

receives. & The switch is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data. 27.

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? & Disable VTP pruning on SW2. & Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. & Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. & Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number. 28. What are three benefits of a hierarchical network model? (Choose three.) & reduced contention for bandwidth & reduced size of the physical layout & increased fault tolerance of the network & elimination of the need for wiring closets & elimination of the need for layer three functionality & simplification of management and troubleshooting 29.

Refer to the exhibit. Which three options correctly identify information that could be associated with this output?(Choose three.) & Interface FastEthernet3/0/0 is subinterfaced. & A non-proprietary trunking protocol is in use. & The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design. & A shutdown command has been applied to interface FastEthernet3/0/0. & Interface FastEthernet3/0/0.3 is mapped to the default management VLAN. & An IP address should be applied to FastEthernet3/0/0 for correct data routing. 30.

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network.

What could be the source of the problem? & All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. & SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. & VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. & The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain. 31.

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator needs to implement inter-VLAN routing on a hierarchical network. On which devices should the inter-VLAN routing be configured? & AS1 and AS2 & DS1 and DS2 & Gateway and CS1 & Gateway, CS1, DS1, and DS2 32. Which three statements are correct concerning the default configuration of a new switch? (Choose three.) & Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled. & Enable password is configured as cisco. & All switch ports are assigned to VLAN1. & The flash directory contains the IOS image. & VLAN1 is configured with a management IP address. & All interfaces are set to auto-negotiation of speed and duplex. 33.

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) & After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. & Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. & The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. & Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. & If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting. 34.

Refer to the exhibit. After the listed commands are entered into router R1 and switch S1, the administrator enters the show interface fa0/1 trunk and gets the results shown. What is the likely problem? & The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. & The trunk has not been established because the router does not support dynamic trunking protocol. & The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for dynamic trunking protocol to establish a trunk. & The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk. 35.

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are about the operation of the interfaces? (Choose two.) & Incoming traffic with VLAN ID 0 is processed by interface fa0/0. & Incoming traffic that has a VLAN ID of 2 is processed by subinterface fa0/0.2. & Both subinterfaces remain up with line protocol up, even if fa0/0 line protocol is down. & Subinterfaces use unique MAC addresses by adding the 802.1Q VLAN ID to the hardware address. & Traffic inbound on this router is processed by different subinterfaces, depending on the VLAN from which the traffic originated. 36. What three tasks should be performed before moving a Catalyst switch to another VTP management domain? (Choose three.) & Select the correct VTP mode and version. & Configure the switch with the name of the new management domain. & Download the VTP database from the VTP server in the new domain. & Configure the VTP server in the new domain to recognize the BID of the switch. & Reset the VTP counters to allow the switch to synchronize with the other switches in the new domain.

& Verify that the switch has a lower configuration revision number than the other switches in the new domain. 37.

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? & only hosts A and B & only hosts A, B, and C & only hosts A, B, C, and D & only hosts A, B, C, and E 38. Which statement regarding the service password-encryption command is ? & The service password-encryption command is entered at the privileged EXEC mode prompt. & The service password-encryption command encrypts only passwords for the console and VTY ports. & The service password-encryption command encrypts all previously unencrypted passwords in the running configuration. & To see the passwords encrypted by the service password-encryption command, enter the no service password-encryption command. 39.

Refer to the exhibit. Which two statements are regarding what the cost value of 23 represents for Switch4? (Choose two.) & This cost represents the lowest cost path for Switch4 to the root switch. & A cost of 23 is the value being advertised out port 16 on the switch upstream (closer) to the root switch. & Switch4 adds the cost of a Fast Ethernet link to 23 to determine its total cost to reach the root switch. & Switch4 is connected via a Fast Ethernet link to an upstream switch that in turn is directly connected to the root switch via a Gigabit Ethernet link. & The root switch is advertising a cost of 23, which is lower than any other switch in the VLAN0001 spanning-tree domain. 40.

Refer to the exhibit. What three statements describe why Host1 and Host2 are unable to communicate? (Choose three.) & The switch ports are on different VLANs. & The switch IP address is on the wrong subnet. & The hosts are configured on different logical networks. & A router is required to forward traffic between Host1 and Host2. & The VLAN port assignments must be contiguous for each VLAN. & The host default gateway addresses must be on the same logical network. 41.

Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values? & switch A & switch B & switch C & switch D & switch E & switch F 42.

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts PC_A and PC_B send traffic simultaneously, and the frames from the transmitting stations collide. What is the last device to receive the collision? & hub HB1 & switch SW1 & router R1 & switch SW2 & router R2 & switch SW4 43. Why is it important that the network administrator consider the spanning-tree

network diameter when choosing the root bridge? & The network diameter limitation is 9. & BPDUs may be discarded because of expiring timers. & The cabling distance between the switches is 100 meters. & The network diameter must be set to the number of meters of the cable between the root bridge and its farthest connected switch. 44.

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured Router1 for inter-VLAN routing. A test of the network, however, shows that hosts on each VLAN can only access local resources and not resources on the other VLAN. What is the most likely cause of this problem? & Switch port Fa0/1 is not trunking. & Router interface Fa0/0 is possibly down. & No routing protocol is configured on Router1. & One of the router subinterfaces is possibly down. 45. What is the purpose of issuing the command switchport mode access on a switch interface? & disable port security & make the port operational & override the default port behavior & force the port to be a part of a single vlan 46.

Refer to the exhibit. Which statement is regarding the information shown? & Only one VLAN is currently configured to use the trunk links. & The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. & A Cisco proprietary protocol is in use for interfaces Fa0/1 and Gi0/1. & Interfaces Gi0/1 and Fa0/1 are allowed to carry data from multiple VLANs 47. Which identifier is used to keep track of frames that are destined for a particular wireless client? & AID & SSID & BSSID & ESSID 48.

Refer to the exhibit. What will happen when frames that contain an unknown source address reach interface fa0/24? & A syslog message will be logged. & Fa0/24 will become error-disabled. & The incoming frames will be dropped. & The security violation count will be incremented. 49. In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? & client & root & server & transparent 50. Which method establishes an administrative connection for configuring the Linksys WRT300N wireless access point?

& Associate with the access point and then open a HyperTerminal session with the access point. & Physically connect to the access point and then reboot the computer to launch the configuration software. & From a computer in the same IP subnet as the access point, enter the default IP address of the access point in a web browser. & Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer connected to the access point so that it exists on the same network, and then reboot your computer to establish a connection. 51. What two methods can be used to remove MAC address table entries from a switch? (Choose two.) & Power cycle the switch to clear all dynamically learned addresses & The clear switching-tables command will remove statically configured entries. & The clear mac-address-table command will remove statically and dynamically configured table entries. & The erase flash command will clear all statically configured table entries. & Statically configured MAC addresses will automatically be removed from the address table 300 minutes after the last activity on a switch port. 52. What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) & requires less equipment & provides improved range & permits increased data rates & has a single-input and a single-output & needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

CCNA 3 Final latest (90%)


Take Assessment - ESwitching Final Exam - CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless (Version 4.0) 1 Refer to the exhibit. The configuration steps that are listed in the exhibit have been entered in switch S1 via console. Subsequent attempts to telnet to the switch are not successful. What is causing the problem? The switch must be configured with SSH version 1. The transport input command must specify Telnet access. The RSA keys must be returned to zero before SSH will permit Telnet access. The ip domain-name command must also be entered in line configuration mode for the vty lines.

2 Refer to the exhibit. How is port Gi1/1 on SWT-A functioning in the spanning-tree topology? It is sending and receiving data frames. It is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. It is participating in the election process by forwarding the BPDUs it receives. It is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data.

Which parameter is a specific frequency at which a wireless access point will operate? BSS WEP SSID ad hoc channel

What will be the effect of the command S1# copy system:running-config tftp://172.16.2.155/tokyo-config The IOS will be copied to the TFTP server. The configuration file named tokyo-config will overwrite the startup configuration file on S1. The running configuration file on S1 will be saved via TFTP to a file named tokyo-config. The contents of NVRAM on S1 will become the startup configuration file on the tokyo switch.

What identifier in the BPDU creates a unique BID for a switch? IP address MAC address bridge priority VLAN ID port priority

Refer to the exhibit. A wireless infrastructure has been established in a company building as shown. The de goal was to allow roaming between the three APs for handheld devices. However, the devices lose connect when the users roam. How can this problem be fixed? Assign different SSIDs to each AP. Reconfigure all APs to the same channel. Use the same BSSID address for each AP. Reposition the APs so that each area of signal strength overlaps the neighbor by at least 10-15%.

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator wants to configure Switch1 to allow SSH connections and prohibit Telnet connections. How should the network administrator change the displayed configuration to sa the requirement?

Use SSH version 1. Reconfigure the RSA key. Configure SSH on a different line. Modify the transport input command.

How does Spanning Tree Protocol aid network architecture? allows for redundant links by eliminating loops provides greater scalability by eliminating collisions reduces switch processor load by reducing broadcast traffic on trunk links reduces administrative overhead by sharing VLAN databases between switches across the network

9 Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 3. Which IP address should be assignedto new host? 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.31 /28 192.168.1.32 /28 192.168.1.52 /28 192.168.1.63 /28

10 In setting up a wireless infrastructure network, which device is used to associate a client computer to the network? an Ethernet switch a wireless access point another wireless computer

a hard-wired computer on the network

11 Which statement about STP network diameter is correct? STP diameters are restricted by convergence times. Layer 2 root elections should be optimized by adjusting BPDU timers to match network diameter.

Using lower bandwidth connections between switches will allow STP to have a larger network diameter.

Portfast can be used to increase the allowable switched network diameter because it disables the forwa delay and maximum age timers. 12 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts that are connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with hosts in the same VLAN that are connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? Introduce a Layer 3 device in the topology. Configure both switches in VTP transparent mode to allow them to share VLAN information. Reconfigure the fa0/1 interface on switch SW1 with a static trunk configuration.

Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to FastEthernet 0/1 on SW1 and FastEthernet 0/2 on S

13

Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs.

Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 3

Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port.

Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of

VLAN 1. 14

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media.

If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line idle before transmitting.

15 What are two requirements for configuring inter-VLAN routing using the router-on-a-stick model? (Choose tw Each subinterface should be configured with its own IP address, subnet mask, and unique VLAN assignment. The physical interface of the router must be connected to a trunk link on the adjacent switch. The number of physical interfaces on the router should match the number of VLANs. Different static VLANs should be assigned to different interfaces of the router. The router should be configured as the VTP server.

16

Refer to the exhibit. Router R1 is properly configured for router on a stick inter-VLAN routing, but PC1 is una to ping PC2. What needs to be done to resolve the problem? Rename VLAN1. Connect one more port of S1 to R1. Configure the Fa0/1 port of S1 as a trunk port.

Move the Fa0/0 interface of R1 to another VLAN.

17 Refer to the exhibit. If switch SW1 is configured with the four VLANs as shown in the exhibit, how many physical interfaces are needed on router R1 to configure inter-VLAN routing using subinterfaces? zero one two four

18 Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3.

19 Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator.

When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perfo a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18.

The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.

20 Which parameter is associated with wireless authentication? shared key SSID ad hoc channel

21

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts B and C attempt to transmit a frame at the same time, but a collision occurs. Whi hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? all hosts that are shown only hosts B and C only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, D, E, and F only hosts D, E, and F

22 What is an efficient and cost effective way to minimize the frequency and effects of broadcast storms on an Ethernet LAN? Connect each PC directly to a router port. Use access control lists to filter broadcasts from the network. Divide the computers into separate VLANs on the existing switches. Divide the computers into separate workgroups using different physical switches.

23

Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. Which VLAN(s) will be allowed o the trunk to SW2 by SW4? VLAN 20 only VLAN 10 and VLAN 30 VLAN 10, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30 VLAN 1, VLAN 20 and VLANs 1002 through 1005

24 What is the correct order in which the STP components are chosen? designated ports, nondesignated ports, root bridge, root ports nondesignated ports, designated ports, root ports, root bridge root bridge, root ports, designated ports, nondesignated ports root ports, root bridge, nondesignated ports, designated ports

25

Refer to the exhibit. Hosts PC_A and PC_B send traffic simultaneously, and the frames from the transmitting stations collide. What is the last device to receive the collision? hub HB1 switch SW1 router R1 switch SW2 router R2 switch SW4

26

Refer to the exhibit. What three statements describe why Host1 and Host2 are unable to communicate? (Choose three.) The switch ports are on different VLANs. The switch IP address is on the wrong subnet. The hosts are configured on different logical networks. A router is required to forward traffic between Host1 and Host2. The VLAN port assignments must be contiguous for each VLAN. The host default gateway addresses must be on the same logical network.

27 Which statement is correct about STP architecture? Spanning Tree Protocol will guarantee a loop free Layer 2 topology. Spanning Tree Protocol guarantees the shortest path to destination networks. The switch with the highest priority will be assigned the lowest BID in the root election. The first step in the spanning-tree election process is to determine the root port.

To select designated ports, the spanning-tree algorithm must determine the longest contiguous path fro the root bridge. 28 While configuring a new switch, a network administrator configures the switch as an HTTP server. What benefits does this configuration provide? This allows the switch to host web pages for the network. This allows remote VPN connections to the switch over the Internet. This is required if a web server or web farm is attached to the switch. This allows web-based configuration tools to be used with the switch.

29 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.)

requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility

30

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator wants to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to Switch1. However, the SSH connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The RSA key has been removed. SSH has been configured on the wrong line. The transport input command is applied incorrectly. The domain name has been configured in the wrong configuration mode.

31

Refer to the exhibit. A new switch, SW3, has been added to the network. The network administrator determi that VLAN information is not propagating to SW3. Which command will remedy the problem? SW1(config)# vtp version 1 SW2(config)# vtp mode client SW3(config)# vtp domain Cisco1 SW3(config)# vtp mode transparent

32 Which CLI mode allows users to access all device commands, such as those used for configuration, management, and troubleshooting? user EXEC mode

privileged EXEC mode global configuration mode interface configuration mode

33

Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference ha been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel.

34 A switch that is using port-based memory buffering receives two incoming frames on the same port. The destination port for the first frame that is received is busy. How will the switch handle the second frame that received? The second frame will have to wait to be delivered even if its destination port is available. The second frame will be delivered to the memory buffer for its destination port. The second frame will be placed in a common memory buffer to await delivery. The second frame will be dropped.

35

Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with host C or host D. What is the cause of this problem? There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk.

The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2.

36

Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production networ without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem? All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain.

VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number o SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain.

37 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size at the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem? The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer.

38

Refer to the exhibit. Which two options correctly describe the router configuration that is shown? (Choose tw Routing between the 192.168.1.0 and 192.168.3.0 networks will not succeed until a routing protocol is configured on the router. VLANs have not been appropriately configured on the router subinterfaces. The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design.

Trunking has been appropriately configured on the router subinterfaces. An IP address should be applied to interface Fa0/1 for routing to occur.

39 Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a "password required, but none set" message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem? The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command.

40

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured R1 and S1 as displayed. However, PC1 is unable to access PC2. What is the likely problem? No routing protocol is configured on R1. The Fa0/1 port of S1 is not a trunk port. The default gateway address is not set on S1. Only one physical link between S1 and R1 is configured for inter-VLAN routing.

41

Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Wheneve inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence t be reduced? Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s.

Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

42

Refer to the exhibit. What are two reasons for the Fa0/24 port being placed in the blocking state? (Choose t This switch is not the root bridge. The Fa0/24 port is administratively down. STP has detected links that create a loop. There is a change in the VTP configuration. The Fa0/24 port is overloaded with too much traffic for its configured bandwidth.

43 Which three actions are performed during the boot sequence of a Cisco switch? (Choose three.) The boot loader uses the self-contained switch operating system to boot the switch. The boot loader retrieves diagnostics routines via TFTP. The boot loader performs POST. The boot loader is loaded from RAM. The boot loader initializes the flash file system that is used to boot the system. The boot loader loads the default operating system if the flash-based operating system is corrupt or missing.

44 Which combination is required to establish a connection to initially configure the Linksys WRT300N wireless access device? a computer with a console connection to the WRT300N a computer with a wireless connection to the WRT300N

a computer with an AUX port connection to the WRT300N

a computer configured in the same IP subnet as the WRT300N and a direct cable connection to i

45

Refer to the exhibit. RTB is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. RTB can ping computer A but canno ping computer B. What is a possible cause of this failure? Port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. RTB does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer B is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/1 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured.

46 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? client root server transparent

47 Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? Disable VTP pruning on SW2. Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number.

48

Refer to the exhibit. What is the effect of setting the security mode to WEP on the Linksys integrated router? WEP identifies the wireless LAN. WEP allows the access point to inform clients of its presence. WEP translates IP addresses into easy-to-remember domain names. WEP encrypts data between the wireless client and the access point. WEP ensures that only authenticated users are allowed access to the WLAN. WEP translates an internal address or group of addresses into an outside, public address.

49 Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 switch Y? QoS routing trunking VPN

50 Refer to the exhibit. All switches are configured with the default bridge priority. Which port will act as a nondesignated port if all links are operating at the same bandwidth? Fa0/1 interface of switch A Fa0/2 interface of switch A Fa0/1 interface of switch B Fa0/2 interface of switch B

Fa0/1 interface of switch C Fa0/2 interface of switch C

51 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks? DSSS OFDM SSID WPA

52 Refer to the exhibit. Computer D sends a broadcast message. Which devices will process the broadcast message? computer E computer D and computer E computer D, computer E, and Router1 computer B and computer E computer B, computer E, and Router1 computer C, computer D, and computer E computer C, computer D, computer E, and Router1 computer A, computer B, computer C, computer D, computer E, and Router1

Tke Assessment ESwitching Final Exam CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless (Version 4.0) This is lastest version i have updated in July 2009 Only 90%, Help me fix it, comment in this post. Thank 1 Refer to the exhibit. The configuration steps that are listed in the exhibit have been entered in switch S1 via the console. Subsequent attempts to telnet to the switch are not successful. What is causing the problem? The switch must be configured with SSH version 1. The transport input command must specify Telnet access. The 2 Refer to the exhibit. How is port Gi1/1 on SWT-A functioning in the spanning-tree topology? It is sending and receiving data frames. It It 3 Which parameter is a specific frequency at which a wireless access point will operate? BSS WEP SSID ad hoc channel 4 What will be the effect of the command S1# copy system:running-config tftp://172.16.2.155/tokyoconfig? The IOS will be copied to the TFTP server. The configuration file named tokyo-config will overwrite the startup configuration file on S1. The running configuration file on S1 will be saved via TFTP to a file named tokyo-config. The contents of NVRAM on S1 will become the startup configuration file on the tokyo switch. 5 What identifier in the BPDU creates a unique BID for a switch? is is receiving in the BPDUs BPDUs, election but process by not sending the data BPDUs it frames. receives. data. participating forwarding RSA keys must be returned to zero before SSH will permit Telnet access. The ip domain-name command must also be entered in line configuration mode for the vty lines.

It is receiving

and populating the MAC address

table, but not sending

IP address MAC address bridge priority VLAN ID port priority 6 Refer to the exhibit. A wireless infrastructure has been established in a company building as shown. The design goal was to allow roaming between the three APs for handheld devices. However, the devices lose connectivity when the users roam. How can this problem be fixed? Assign different SSIDs to each AP. Reconfigure all APs to the same channel. Use the same BSSID address for each AP. Reposition the APs so that each area of signal strength overlaps the neighbor by at least 1015%. 7 Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator wants to configure Switch1 to allow SSH connections and prohibit Telnet connections. How should the network administrator change the displayed configuration to satisfy the requirement? Use SSH version 1. Reconfigure the RSA key. Configure SSH on a different line. Modify the transport input command. www.ccna4u.org www.ccna4u.net 8

How does Spanning Tree Protocol aid network architecture? allows for redundant links by eliminating loops provides greater scalability by eliminating collisions reduces switch processor load by reducing broadcast traffic on trunk links reduces administrative overhead by sharing VLAN databases between switches across the network 9 Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 3. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 192.168.1.22 /28 192.168.1.31 /28 192.168.1.32 /28 192.168.1.52 /28 192.168.1.63 /28 10 In setting up a wireless infrastructure network, which device is used to associate a client computer to the network? an Ethernet switch a wireless access point another wireless computer a hard-wired computer on the network 11 Which statement about STP network diameter is correct?

STP diameters are restricted by convergence times. Layer 2 root elections should be optimized by adjusting BPDU timers to match network diameter. Using lower bandwidth connections between switches will allow STP to have a larger network diameter. Portfast can be used to increase the allowable switched network diameter because it disables the forward delay and maximum age timers. 12 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts that are connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with hosts in the same VLAN that are connected to switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? Introduce a Layer 3 device in the topology. Configure both switches in VTP transparent mode to allow them to share VLAN information. Reconfigure the fa0/1 interface on switch SW1 with a static trunk configuration. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to FastEthernet 0/1 on SW1 and FastEthernet 0/2 on SW2. 13 Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/3 on switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical of VLAN 1. 14 network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member

Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond on the network? (Choose two.) After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting. 15 What are two requirements for configuring inter-VLAN routing using the router-on-a-stick model? (Choose two.) Each subinterface should be configured with its own IP address, subnet mask, and unique VLAN assignment. The physical interface of the router must be connected to a trunk link on the adjacent switch. The number of physical interfaces on the router should match the number of VLANs. Different static VLANs should be assigned to different interfaces of the router. The router should be configured as the VTP server. 16 Refer to the exhibit. Router R1 is properly configured for router on a stick inter-VLAN routing, but PC1 is unable to ping PC2. What needs to be done to resolve the problem? Rename VLAN1. Connect one more port of S1 to R1. Configure the Fa0/1 port of S1 as a trunk port. Move the Fa0/0 interface of R1 to another VLAN. 17

Refer to the exhibit. If switch SW1 is configured with the four VLANs as shown in the exhibit, how many physical interfaces are needed on router R1 to configure inter-VLAN routing using subinterfaces? zero one two four 18 Refer to the exhibit. Router RA receives a packet with a source address of 192.168.1.35 and a destination address of 192.168.1.85. What will the router do with this packet? The router will drop the packet. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.1. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. The router will forward the packet out interface FastEthernet 0/1.2 and interface FastEthernet 0/1.3. 19 Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18. The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18. 20

Which parameter is associated with wireless authentication? shared key SSID ad hoc channel 21 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts B and C attempt to transmit a frame at the same time, but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? all hosts that are shown only hosts B and C only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, D, E, and F only hosts D, E, and F 22 What is an efficient and cost effective way to minimize the frequency and effects of broadcast storms on an Ethernet LAN? Connect each PC directly to a router port. Use access control lists to filter broadcasts from the network. Divide the computers into separate VLANs on the existing switches. Divide the computers into separate workgroups using different physical switches.

23 Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. Which VLAN(s) will be allowed on the trunk to SW2 by SW4? VLAN 20 only VLAN 10 and VLAN 30 VLAN 10, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30 VLAN 1, VLAN 20 and VLANs 1002 through 1005 24 What is the correct order in which the STP components are chosen? designated ports, nondesignated ports, root bridge, root ports nondesignated ports, designated ports, root ports, root bridge root bridge, root ports, designated ports, nondesignated ports root ports, root bridge, nondesignated ports, designated ports 25 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts PC_A and PC_B send traffic simultaneously, and the frames from the transmitting stations collide. What is the last device to receive the collision? hub HB1 switch SW1 router R1 switch SW2 router R2

switch SW4 26 Refer to the exhibit. What three statements describe why Host1 and Host2 are unable to communicate? (Choose three.) The switch ports are on different VLANs. The switch IP address is on the wrong subnet. The hosts are configured on different logical networks. A router is required to forward traffic between Host1 and Host2. The VLAN port assignments must be contiguous for each VLAN. The host default gateway addresses must be on the same logical network. 27 Which statement is correct about STP architecture? Spanning Tree Protocol will guarantee a loop free Layer 2 topology. Spanning Tree Protocol guarantees the shortest path to destination networks. The switch with the highest priority will be assigned the lowest BID in the root election. The first step in the spanning-tree election process is to determine the root port. To select designated ports, the spanning-tree algorithm must determine the longest contiguous path from the root bridge. 28 While configuring a new switch, a network administrator configures the switch as an HTTP server. What benefits does this configuration provide? This allows the switch to host web pages for the network.

This allows remote VPN connections to the switch over the Internet. This is required if a web server or web farm is attached to the switch. This allows web-based configuration tools to be used with the switch. 29 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility 30 Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator wants to allow both SSH and Telnet connections to Switch1. However, the SSH connections fail. What is the most likely cause of this problem? The RSA key has been removed. SSH has been configured on the wrong line. The transport input command is applied incorrectly. The domain name has been configured in the wrong configuration mode. 31 Refer to the exhibit. A new switch, SW3, has been added to the network. The network administrator determines that VLAN information is not propagating to SW3. Which command will remedy the problem? SW1(config)# vtp version 1

SW2(config)# vtp mode client SW3(config)# vtp domain Cisco1 SW3(config)# vtp mode transparent 32 Which CLI mode allows users to access all device commands, such as those used for configuration, management, and troubleshooting? user EXEC mode privileged EXEC mode global configuration mode interface configuration mode 33 Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel. 34 A switch that is using port-based memory buffering receives two incoming frames on the same port. The destination port for the first frame that is received is busy. How will the switch handle the second frame that it received? The second frame will have to wait to be delivered even if its destination port is available. The second frame will be delivered to the memory buffer for its destination port.

The second frame will be placed in a common memory buffer to await delivery. The second frame will be dropped. 35 Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B, C, and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with host C or host D. What is the cause of this problem? There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2. 36 Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 was tested in a lab environment and then inserted into a production network without reloading its configuration. After the trunk link between SW1 and SW2 was brought up, all users lost connectivity to the network. What could be the source of the problem? All the VLANs were pruned from the trunk port between SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 cannot be both set as VTP servers in the same VTP domain. VTP configuration revision number of SW2 was higher than the configuration revision number of SW1. The additional VLANs from SW2 created more VLANs than the VLAN database of SW1 could contain. 37 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size at the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem?

The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer. 38 Refer to the exhibit. Which two options correctly describe the router configuration that is shown? (Choose two.) Routing between the 192.168.1.0 and 192.168.3.0 networks will not succeed until a routing protocol is configured on the router. VLANs have not been appropriately configured on the router subinterfaces. The configuration is appropriate for a router-on-a-stick network design. Trunking has been appropriately configured on the router subinterfaces. An IP address should be applied to interface Fa0/1 for routing to occur. 39 Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a password required, but none set message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem? The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines. The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command. 40

Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator has segmented the network into two VLANs and configured R1 and S1 as displayed. However, PC1 is unable to access PC2. What is the likely problem? No routing protocol is configured on R1. The Fa0/1 port of S1 is not a trunk port. The default gateway address is not set on S1. Only one physical link between S1 and R1 is configured for inter-VLAN routing. 41 Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute to completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced? Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. 42 Refer to the exhibit. What are two reasons for the Fa0/24 port being placed in the blocking state? (Choose This switch is not the root bridge. The Fa0/24 port is administratively down. STP has detected links that create a loop. There is a change in the VTP configuration. The 43 Fa0/24 port is overloaded with too much traffic for its configured bandwidth. two.)

Which three actions are performed during the boot sequence of a Cisco switch? (Choose three.) The boot loader uses the self-contained switch operating system to boot the switch. The boot loader retrieves diagnostics routines via TFTP. The boot loader performs POST. The boot loader is loaded from RAM. The boot loader initializes the flash file system that is used to boot the system. The boot loader loads the default operating system if the flash-based operating system is corrupt or missing. 44 Which combination is required to establish a connection to initially configure the Linksys WRT300N wireless access device? a computer with a console connection to the WRT300N a computer with a wireless connection to the WRT300N a computer with an AUX port connection to the WRT300N a computer configured in the same IP subnet as the WRT300N and a direct cable connection to it 45 Refer to the exhibit. RTB is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. RTB can ping computer A but cannot ping computer B. What is a possible cause of this failure? Port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. RTB does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer B is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/1 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured. 46

In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it has been configured to only forward VTP advertisements? client root server transparent 47 Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 so that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? Disable VTP pruning on SW2. Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number. 48 Refer to the exhibit. What is the effect of setting the security mode to WEP on the Linksys integrated router? WEP identifies the wireless LAN. WEP allows the access point to inform clients of its presence. WEP translates IP addresses into easy-to-remember domain names. WEP encrypts data between the wireless client and the access point. WEP ensures that only authenticated users are allowed access to the WLAN. WEP translates an internal address or group of addresses into an outside, public address.

49 Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? QoS routing trunking VPN 50 Refer to the exhibit. All switches are configured with the default bridge priority. Which port will act as a non-designated port if all links are operating at the same bandwidth? Fa0/1 interface of switch A Fa0/2 interface of switch A Fa0/1 interface of switch B

Fa0/2 interface of switch B Fa0/1 interface of switch C Fa0/2 interface of switch C 51 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks? DSSS OFDM SSID

WPA

1 Which value determines if a switch becomes the central point of reference in the spanning tree topology? lowest bridge ID highest revision number lowest numeric IP address highest numeric MAC address 2 Refer to the exhibit. What is the purpose of the configuration commands that are shown? to activate port Fa0/10 to make the port a member of VLAN 30 to activate port security on port Fa0/10 to add VLAN 30 to the trunk that is connected to port Fa0/10 3 Refer to the exhibit. What would happen if the network administrator moved the network cable of Host A from interface Fa0/1 to Fa0/switch SW1? Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the router is routing traffic between VLANs. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, because port Fa0/3 has been manually assigned to VLAN 30. Host A remains a member of VLAN 10, because the switch provides dynamic VLAN assignment for the port. Host A maintains connectivity to all members of VLAN 10, because it is connected to the same physical network. Host A is no longer a member of VLAN 10, but because port Fa0/3 was unused, it is now a member of VLAN 1. 4 Which device or devices should have the Spanning Tree Protocol enabled to prevent host traffic from creating a broadcast storm? Core_S1 Access_S2 and Access_S3 Core_S1, Access_S2, and Access_S3

Core_S1, Access_S2, Access_S3, and R1 5 Refer to the exhibit. The hosts connected to switch SW1 are not able to communicate with the hosts in the same VLANs connected switch SW2. What should be done to fix the problem? Configure VLANs with different VLAN IDs on switch SW2. Reconfigure the trunk port on switch SW2 with static trunk configuration. Introduce a Layer 3 device or a switch with Layer 3 capability in the topology. Apply IP addresses that are in the same subnet to the interfaces used to connect SW1 and SW2. 6 Refer to the exhibit. The Layer 2 switching design that is shown has been implemented in a campus environment that is using Spanning Tree Protocol. All inter-switch links that are shown are trunks. Whenever an inter-switch link fails, the network takes nearly a minute completely converge. How can the convergence time be reduced? Increase the capacity of the distribution and core trunk links to 10 Gb/s. Add a trunk link that directly connects D1 and D2. Use Layer 3 switching on the core switch. Implement Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. 7 What will be the effect of the command S1# copy system:running-config tftp://172.16.2.155/tokyo-config? The IOS will be copied to the TFTP server. The configuration file named tokyo-config will overwrite the startup configuration file on S1. The running configuration file on S1 will be saved via TFTP to a file named tokyo-config. The contents of NVRAM on S1 will become the startup configuration file on the tokyo switch. 8 Refer to the exhibit. What does the term DYNAMIC indicate in the output that is shown? This entry can only be removed from the MAC address table by a network administrator. When forwarding a frame to the device with address 0060.5c5b.cd23, the switch does not have to perform a lookup to determine the final destination port. Only the device with MAC address 0060.5c5b.cd23 will be allowed to connect to port Fa0/18. The switch learned this MAC address from the source address in a frame received on Fa0/18.9 Which two statements are correct about

wireless infrastructure components? (Choose two.) An AP converts the TCP/IP data packets from their 802.11 frame encapsulation format to the 802.3 Ethernet frame format on the wired Ethernet network. A wireless AP does not require any physical connection to allow wireless clients to access the Internet. An AP is a layer 2 device, similar to a switch, that provides dedicated bandwidth to each connected wireless host. Collisions do not occur between wireless NICs and APs. The wireless router performs the roles of AP and router. 10 Which service should be disabled on a Cisco switch or router to prevent packet sniffers from capturing information about the device? SSH VTP CDP SNMP 11 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts A and B, connected to hub HB1, attempt to transmit a frame at the same time but a collision occurs. Which hosts will receive the collision jamming signal? only hosts A and B only hosts A, B, and C only hosts A, B, C, and D only hosts A, B, C, and E 12 What are three benefits of employing a hierarchical network design? (Choose three.) Hierarchically designed networks can more easily be expanded to suit future needs. Hierarchical design models enhance existing bandwidth through the use of link aggregation. The hierarchical model allows for specialized functionality at each layer, simplifying device management.Use of a hierarchical design allows replacement of redundant devices with high-capacity network equipment. A hierarchical design uses firewalls instead of complicated port-based and distribution layer security policies. The hierarchical model allows the use of high-performance switches at all design layers, thus allowing for a fully-meshed topology. 13 A network administrator implements inter-VLAN routing by configuring subinterfaces on a router. What is one important fact that must considered?

The physical interface must have an IP address configured. The subinterface numbers must match the VLAN ID number. The no shutdown command must be issued on each subinterface. The IP address of each router subinterface must be used as the default gateway for hosts on the corresponding VLAN. 14 Which type of frame contains information that is used in the election of the spanning tree root bridge? BID LSA LSU BPDU 15 Refer to the exhibit. Each switch is shown with its MAC address. Which switch will be elected as the spanning-tree root bridge if the switches are configured with their default priority values? switch A switch B switch C switch D switch E switch F Close Window Assessment System 1. Assessment Selection 2. Assessment Settings 3. Take Assessment Take Assessment ESwitching Final Exam CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless (Version 4.0) Time Remaining: 16 Refer to the exhibit. What will happen when frames with a source address other than 0019.d2e4.d9f7 enters interface Fa0/24? Fa0/24 will become error-disabled. The incoming frames will be dropped. The Fa0/24 port LED will be turned off. The security violation count will be incremented. 17 Refer to the exhibit. The network administrator has just added VLAN 50 to Switch1 and Switch2. Hosts A, B, C, and D are correctly configured with IP addresses in the subnet range for VLAN 50. Host A can communicate with host B, but cannot communicate with C or host D. What is the cause of this problem?

There is a native VLAN mismatch. The Fa0/11 interface of Switch1 is not configured as a trunk. The link between Switch1 and Switch2 is up but not trunked. VLAN 50 is not allowed on the trunk link between Switch1 and Switch2. 18 Refer to the exhibit. A network administrator enters the displayed commands to configure VLAN 30. What is the result of running these commands? VLAN 30 will be added to S1, S2, and S3, but not to S4. VLAN 30 will be pruned from the VLAN database of S3. VLAN 30 will be added to the VLAN database of S3 but will not be propagated to S4, S2 or S1. VLAN 30 will not be added to the VLAN database of S3 and an error message will be displayed. 19 Refer to the exhibit. R1 is configured for traditional inter-VLAN routing. R1 can ping computer 3 but cannot ping computer 1. What is possible cause for this failure? S1 port Fa0/11 is in the wrong VLAN. R1 does not have an active routing protocol. The IP address of computer 1 is in the wrong logical network. Router interface Fa0/0 has the wrong trunk encapsulation type configured. 20 Refer to the exhibit. How does SW1 manage traffic coming from Host A? SW1 drops the traffic because it is untagged. SW1 leaves the traffic untagged and forwards it over the trunk. SW1 tags the traffic with the lowest VLAN ID value and forwards it over the trunk link. SW1 encapsulates the traffic with 802.1Q encapsulation and forwards it over the trunk link. 21 Refer to the exhibit. What will allow a host on VLAN 40 on switch X to communicate with a host in VLAN 40 on switch Y? QoS routing trunking VPN 22 When implementing a router-on-a-stick, what must be configured on the router to ensure connectivity between different VLANs? subinterfaces routing protocol

switched virtual circuits dynamic trunking protocol 23 Refer to the exhibit. Users complain that they do not have connectivity to the web server that is connected to SW1. What should be to remedy the problem? Allow all VLANs on the trunk link. Configure VLAN 100 as the native VLAN for SW1. Configure the trunk port in trunk mode on SW1. Attach the web server to a router and configure inter-VLAN routing. 24 Which method establishes an administrative connection for configuring the Linksys WRT300N wireless access point? Associate with the access point and then open a HyperTerminal session with the access point. Physically connect to the access point and then reboot the computer to launch the configuration software. From a computer in the same IP subnet as the access point, enter the default IP address of the access point in a web browser. Modify the TCP/IP properties of the computer connected to the access point so that it exists on the same network, and then reboot your computer to establish a connection. 25 Company policy requires disabling the command history buffer on network devices. An administrator enters terminal no history size the command prompt on a Cisco Catalyst switch and receives no error messages back, but the command history buffer is still available. What is the problem? The command contained a syntax error. The Cisco IOS version does not support disabling the command history buffer. The command history can only be disabled on a router, not a switch. The size parameter reset the default buffer size but did not disable access to the buffer.26 Refer to the exhibit. What does FORWARDING mean in the command output shown? The switch is sending and receiving data frames.The switch is receiving BPDUs, but not sending data frames. The switch is participating in an election process by forwarding the BPDUs it receives. The switch is receiving BPDUs and populating the MAC address table, but not sending data. 27 Refer to the exhibit. Which switch will be elected as the root bridge of the

spanning tree topology? Cat-A Cat-B Cat-C Cat-D 28 Refer to the exhibit. A new host needs to be connected to VLAN 1. Which IP address should be assigned to this new host? 192.168.1.11 /28 192.168.1.22 /28192.168.1.33 /28 192.168.1.44 /28 192.168.1.55 /28 29 Refer to the exhibit. All trunk links are operational and all VLANs are allowed on all trunk links. An ARP request is sent by computer Which device or devices will receive this message? only computer 4 computer 3 and RTR-Acomputer 4 and RTR-A computer 1, computer 2, computer 4, and RTR-A computer 1, computer 2, computer 3, computer 4, and RTR-A all of the computers and the router 30 Refer to the exhibit. The switches in the exhibit have VTP pruning enabled. What will be pruned in the VTP advertisements from switch ST-C to switch ST-1? VLAN 30 VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 VLAN 1, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30 VLAN 2 through VLAN 29, and VLAN 31 through VLAN 1000 Showing 2 of 4 Close Window All contents copyright 1992-2009 Cisco Systems, Inc. Privacy Statement and Trademarks. Close Window Assessment System 1. Assessment Selection 2. Assessment Settings 3. Take Assessment Take Assessment ESwitching Final Exam CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless (Version 4.0) Time Remaining: 31 Refer to the exhibit. An administrator documented the output of a CAM table

from an Ethernet switch as shown. What action will the switch take when it receives the frame shown at the bottom of the exhibit? discard the frame forward the frame out port 2 forward the frame out port 3 forward the frame out all ports forward the frame out all ports except port 3 add station 00-00-3D-1F-11-05 to port 2 in the forwarding table 32 What are two requirements for configuring inter-VLAN routing using the router-on-a-stick model? (Choose two.) Each subinterface should be configured with its own IP address, subnet mask, and unique VLAN assignment. The physical interface of the router must be connected to a trunk link on the adjacent switch.The number of physical interfaces on the router should match the number of VLANs. Different static VLANs should be assigned to different interfaces of the router. The router should be configured as the VTP server. 33 Refer to the exhibit. The switch VTY lines have been properly configured, but PC1 is unable to remotely manage the switch. How can this problem be resolved? Configure the Fa0/1 interface of the switch in trunk mode. Configure a default gateway on the switch.Configure the native VLAN on the switch. Configure the Fa0/1 interface of the switch to allow all VLANs. 34 Refer to the exhibit. After entering the commands in the exhibit, the administrator receives a password required, but none set message when attempting to connect to S1. What is the problem? The enable secret password was not set. S1 does not have login configured on the vty lines. S1 does not have a password configured for the vty lines.The crypto key is not properly configured to generate passwords. The VLAN1 interface has not be enabled with the no shutdown command. 35 Refer to the exhibit. After the listed commands are entered into router R1 and switch S1, the administrator enters the show interface fa0/1 trunk and gets the results shown. What is the likely problem? The trunk is established, but no VLANs have been configured to use it. The router is missing the dynamic trunking protocol statements necessary to form a trunk.

The trunk has not been established because the router does not support dynamic trunking protocol.The router, the switch, or both must be configured with the dynamic desirable option for dynamic trunking protocol to establish trunk. 36 Which parameter is used to uniquely identify one wireless network from another? SSIDOFDM WEP DSSS 37 Refer to the exhibit. Switch SW2 has been newly purchased and added to the network. What configuration should be applied to SW2 that it participates in the same VTP domain as switch SW1, receives VLAN information from SW1, and synchronizes VLAN information? Disable VTP pruning on SW2. Configure SW2 in VTP transparent mode. Configure SW2 with the VTP domain password. Configure SW2 as a VTP server with a higher revision number. 38 Refer to the exhibit. In what two ways will the router handle VLAN traffic that is received on the trunk? (Choose two.) Traffic to VLAN 1 received by the router interface Fa0/0 will be dropped by the router.Because interface Fa0/0 requires an IP address, the router will not be able to route between the VLANs. Packets that are received from network 192.168.20.0 /24 will be handled by subinterface Fa0/0.20.The router will use subinterface MAC addresses to identify the VLAN traffic that is received on the physical interface. The router will continue to process traffic from the attached VLANs even if the physical interface goes down. http://www.ccna4u.org 39 In which mode is a VTP switch operating if it does not allow for the creation of local VLANs but it does accept VLAN updates from other switches in the same domain? client root server transparent 40 Which configuration changes will increment the configuration revision number on the VTP server?

configuring trunk links on the VTP server configuring or changing the VTP password configuring or changing the VTP domain name configuring or changing the VTP version number configuring or deleting a VLAN or creating a VLAN name 41 Refer to the exhibit. Switches S2 and S3 are properly connected using an ethernet cable. A network administrator has configured both switches with VTP, but S3 is unable to propagate VLANs to S2. What could be the reason for this? The VTP configuration revision is different on both switches. The VTP domains are different on both switches. VTP pruning is disabled. VTP v2 is disabled. 42 Refer to the exhibit. What is true of the configuration of switch S1? Only VLAN 99 will be allowed to use the trunk links. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 are configured with a standard trunking protocol. Switch ports Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 should be configured as access ports to allow data from multiple VLANs to access switch S1. The switch negotiated trunk links for interfaces Fa0/1 and Fa0/3 because all connected interfaces have been configured with the switchport mode dynamic auto command. 43 What is an efficient and cost effective way to minimize the frequency and effects of broadcast storms on an Ethernet LAN? Connect each PC directly to a router port. Use access control lists to filter broadcasts from the network. Divide the computers into separate VLANs on the existing switches. Divide the computers into separate workgroups using different physical switches. 44 Refer to the exhibit. The configuration steps that are listed in the exhibit have been entered in switch S1 via the console. Subsequent attempts to telnet to the switch are not successful. What is causing the problem? The switch must be configured with SSH version 1. The transport input command must specify Telnet access. The RSA keys must be returned to zero before SSH will permit Telnet access. The ip domain-name command must also be entered in line configuration mode for the vty lines.

45 Why is it important that the network administrator consider the spanningtree network diameter when choosing the root bridge? The network diameter limitation is 9. BPDUs may be discarded because of expiring timers. The cabling distance between the switches is 100 meters. The network diameter must be set to the number of meters of the cable between the root bridge and its farthest connected switch. Showing 3 of 4 Close Window Assessment System 1. Assessment Selection 2. Assessment Settings 3. Take Assessment Take Assessment ESwitching Final Exam CCNA Exploration: LAN Switching and Wireless (Version 4.0) Time Remaining: 46 Refer to the exhibit. The commands are entered into switch SW1 as shown, and an 802.1q trunk is successfully established. How does switch SW1 handle the untagged traffic that is destined for the trunk? SW1 will drop all untagged traffic. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 1. SW1 will send all untagged traffic to VLAN 25. SW1 will send untagged traffic to all VLANs that are configured on the trunk. 47 Refer to the exhibit. All hosts are in listen mode. Host 1 and Host 4 both transmit data at the same time. How do the hosts respond the network? (Choose two.) After the end of the jam signal, a backoff algorithm is invoked. Hosts 1 and 4 are operating full duplex so no collision will exist. The hub will block the port connected to Host 4 to prevent a collision. Hosts 1 and 4 are assigned shorter backoff values to provide them priority to access the media. If a host has data to transmit after the backoff period of that host, the host checks to determine if the line is idle before transmitting. 48 Refer to the exhibit. Hosts PC_A and PC_B send traffic simultaneously, and the frames from the transmitting stations collide. What last device to receive the collision? hub HB1 switch SW1 router R1

switch SW2 router R2 switch SW4 49 What provides an authentication mechanism for 802.11-based wireless networks? DSSS OFDM SSID WPA 50 What are two benefits of the IEEE 802.11n standard over the IEEE 802.11G? (Choose two.) requires less equipment provides improved range permits increased data rates has a single-input and a single-output needs no hardware upgrade for compatibility 51 Refer to the exhibit. Users A and B are reporting intermittent connectivity problems. Pre-installation surveys showed strong signal strength from the AP locations to the client locations. Outside electrical interference has been eliminated. What will fix the problem? Relocate the APs closer to each other. Increase the distance between the clients. Change the channel on AP-B to 6 or 11. Place AP-A and AP-B on the same wireless channel. 52 Why is MAC address filtering considered a poor choice in securing a WLAN? Available bandwidth is reduced. MAC addresses are easily spoofed. APs are more susceptible to DoS attacks. The payload encryption is easily broken.

Вам также может понравиться